Manual - BMW of North America

ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Contents
A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
M3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M3.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M3's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW M3 throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
© 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/08, 08 09 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
10
16
21
22
Cockpit
iDrive
Letters and numbers
Voice activation system
Controls
26
42
53
55
68
81
Opening and closing
Adjustments
Transporting children safely
Driving
Everything under control
Technology for driving comfort and
safety
92 Lamps
96 Climate
101 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
116 Things to remember when driving
121 BMW M3 engineering
Communications
172 Telephone
183 Contacts
185 BMW Assist
Mobility
194
196
202
207
209
213
221
Refueling
Wheels and tires
Under the hood
Maintenance
Care
Replacing components
Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
228 Technical data
232 Short commands for the voice activation
system
238 Everything from A-Z
Navigation
Navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if …
Mobility
126
127
137
143
Controls
Notes
Reporting safety defects
On/off and tone
Radio
Satellite radio
CD player and CD changer
Music collection
AUX-IN port
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio
interface
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
4
6
146
149
152
154
161
165
166
Navigation
Using this Owner's Manual
Entertainment
Communications Entertainment
The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 238.
Driving tips
Contents
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Notes
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Symbols used
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Parts and accessories
Navigation
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Communications Entertainment
Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.
Maintenance and repair
Mobility
When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.
For your own safety
Reference
The individual vehicle
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Notes
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Service and warranty
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
California Proposition 65 warning
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-8311117.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
For Canadian customers
Controls
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1
Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 36
2
Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 35
Low beams 92
3
Opening and closing front
windows 35
Automatic headlamp control* 92
Adaptive Head Light* 93
4
Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 48
5
Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor* 48
6
Parking lamps/low beams 92
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Roadside parking lamps* 94
MDrive*, calling up individual
settings 50
Recirculated-air mode 98
Computer 69
8
9
Settings and information about the
vehicle 71
13 Horn: the entire surface
Instrument lighting 94
15
Instrument cluster 12
Windshield wipers 65
Controls
High beams, headlamp flasher 94
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
Turn signals 64
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 50
Cruise control 66
16 Releasing the hood 202
17 Opening the luggage compartment lid 31
Driving tips
7
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 55
Communications Entertainment
11 Ignition lock 55
12 Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone*:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing* selected
phone numbers. Redialing if
no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Mobility
Activating/deactivating voice activation system* 22
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
10
Navigation
Rain sensor* 65
Cockpit
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Instrument cluster
1
Speedometer
2
Indicator lamps for turn signals
3
Indicator and warning lamps 13
4
Tachometer 68
5
Shift Lights* 62
6
Engine oil temperature 69
7
Display for
8
Display for
> Gear display M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic* 58
> With manual transmission:
Computer 69
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 72
> Odometer and trip odometer 68
> Clock 68
> Checking oil level 203
> Outside temperature 68
> Settings and information 71
> Indicator and warning lamps 76
> With dual clutch transmission:
Computer 69
>
9
There is a Check Control
message 76
Fuel gauge 69
10 Resetting the trip odometer 68
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator lamps without text messages
The concept
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Parking lamps/low beams 92
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Explanatory text messages
Lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive forces in
order to maintain driving stability 82
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on exhaust emissions 208
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust
emissions 208
Communications Entertainment
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
M Dynamic Mode* 82
Mobility
Text messages at the top edge of the Control
Display describe the meanings of the indicator
and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 76.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Driving tips
MDrive* 50
Navigation
Parking brake applied 57
Controls
High beams/headlamp flasher 94
Cockpit
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Around the center console: controls and displays
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3
Reading lamps 95
4
Coupe: glass roof, electric* 37
5
Interior lamps 94
6
Passenger airbag status lamp* 89
7
Control Display 16
8
Hazard warning flashers
9
Flat Tire Monitor FTM* 84
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* 85
10 Central locking system 30
11 Automatic climate control
Air distribution to the
windshield 97
15 Changing
> Radio station 149
> Track 154
16
Heated seats* 46
Coupe:
Roller sun blind* 104
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
19
Convertible:
Opening and closing retractable
hardtop 39
Air distribution to the upper body
area 97
20 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
Air distribution to the footwell 97
22 M Engine Dynamics Control POWER 64
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 97
Cooling function 99
21 Electronic Damper Control EDC* 83
23 Programmable memory keys 20
24 Switching audio sources on/off and adjusting volume 146
25 Ejecting CD/DVD 146
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC 98
Recirculated-air mode 98
Maximum cooling 97
Residual heat mode 98
Air flow rate 98
Controls
SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call* 221
Driving tips
2
14 Selecting AM or FM waveband
Navigation
Microphone for voice activation system*
and for telephone in hands-free mode*
Communications Entertainment
1
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Rear window defroster 99
12 CD/DVD drive 146
13 Changing the audio and entertainment
sources
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Defrosting windows 99
iDrive
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1
Control Display
2
Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrow 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Buttons on the controller
Function
Open the main menu
RADIO
Open the Radio menu
Open the CD/Entertainment menu
NAV
Open the Navigation menu
TEL
Open the Telephone menu
BACK
Display the previous menu
OPTION
Open the Options menu
Operating principle
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is executed.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"Settings"
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
Mobility
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Navigation
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
Reference
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 55, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:
Controls
CD
Driving tips
Button
MENU
iDrive
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.
Open the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or settings can be selected that are currently not visible.<
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.
4
Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins*:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Switching the Control Display
off/on
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off display"
Driving tips
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system*.
Controls
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Press the controller to switch on.
1
Time
Split screen
2
Display for:
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g. information
from the computer.
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS* received
3
Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*
> Telephone*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Selecting the display for the split
screen content
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
Reference
>
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Status information
iDrive
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
Displaying brief information
2. Select the display.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Programmable memory keys
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory keys and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
...
Touch the button.
Displaying detailed information
...
Press the button for an
extended period.
Storing functions
1. Select the function via iDrive.
2.
...
Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Example for programmable memory
keys
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the
4.
symbol using the controller.
...
Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
...
Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
Controls
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Driving tips
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete one letter
or number
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Navigation
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Communications Entertainment
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the
Control Display.
Voice activation system
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Voice activation system*
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
Coupe: the voice activation system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Convertible: the voice activation system uses a
special microphone located in the area of the
steering column.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spoken commands.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice activation system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 79.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice activation system.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Display.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the
or
button on the steering wheel
{Cancel}
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. "Speech mode:"
Possible commands
Controls
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Display.
To have the available commands read aloud:
{Voice commands}
{Radio on} or {Radio}
Driving tips
> "Short"
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the following:
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 232.
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{CD track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbreviated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. This also
applies when spelling out and saying a full
word during destination entry.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
> "Default"
Communications Entertainment
Using alternative commands
4. To select the setting:
Mobility
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the commands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.
Reference
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the button on the steering wheel.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
Remote control
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient
access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 35.
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.
In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 207.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if convenient access* is
in use.
Integrated key
Personal Profile settings
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile below.
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 20
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 27
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat position after unlocking, refer to page 46
> Glove compartment, refer to page 104
> Programming buttons on the steering
wheel, refer to page 50
> Driver's door, refer to page 30
> MDrive*, refer to page 50
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
> Brightness of Control Display, refer to
page 79
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79
> Units of measure, refer to page 71
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC*, refer to page 81
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 92
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 93
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 93
> Automatic climate control: activating/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated-air control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 97 ff
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 146
> Tone control, refer to page 146
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 147
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Via the door lock*
> In cars with convenient access*, via the
handles on the driver's and front passenger's doors
In addition, if the remote control is used, the
welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's
courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The
alarm system* is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system, refer to
page 32.
Controls
> Via the remote control
Driving tips
> Date format, refer to page 76
Operating from outside
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable
hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and luggage compartment lid must be
closed and the cargo bay partition must be
folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer
also to page 39.<
Unlocking
Press the
button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the
welcome lamps come on.
> Doors
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 75
> Convertible: glove compartment
Communications Entertainment
> Settings for the displays on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:
> Fuel filler door
Mobility
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 64
> Luggage compartment lid
Reference
> Calling up the preferred program of the M
Engine Dynamics Control POWER and
Electronic Damper Control EDC* when
starting the vehicle, refer to Configuring
settings on page 50
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the
button.
2. "Door locks"
Convertible: convenient closing*
3. "Unlock button"
Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the
vehicle, you can close the retractable hardtop
and the windows using the remote control for
convenient access.
Hold the
button down.
The retractable hardtop and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the
button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Comfort opening", refer to page 28
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Hold the
button down.
The windows and the glass roof* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the
vehicle, you can open the retractable hardtop
using the remote control for convenient access.
Hold the
button down.
The windows and the retractable hardtop are
opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the
dows move up.
button, the win-
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the
button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid
Press the
button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings
backwards and up when opened. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the
remote control in the cargo bay. A previously
locked luggage compartment lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the luggage compartment lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading*
Within a range of approx. 13ft/4m from the vehicle you can use the remote control to half close
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
4. Press the
button for a longer period to
fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Setting confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock./unlock."
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
4. Press the controller.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle is switched on.
Controls
3. Press down the cargo bay partition until it
engages on both sides and close the luggage compartment lid.
Driving tips
2. Open the luggage compartment lid, press
the cargo bay partition upward and stow the
cargo in the cargo bay.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 26. The remote control for convenient
access* contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 35.
Navigation
1. Briefly press the
button and, within one
second, press again and hold until the
retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate
position. The luggage compartment lid
opens slightly.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the
remote control is interrupted briefly, the movement will be completed more quickly if you keep
the corresponding button pressed continuously.
Communications Entertainment
the retractable hardtop when it is open to ease
loading of the cargo bay.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Malfunctions
Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system* or
convenient access*, only the driver's door can
be locked and unlocked with the integrated key
via the door lock.
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
trapped. Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 27.
Coupe
In vehicles without an alarm system* or
convenient access*, only the driver's
door can be locked via the door lock.<
To lock all doors, the fuel filler door and the luggage compartment lid at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 30.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger's door, refer to page 31.
3. Lock the vehicle.
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid when the doors
are closed, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
> Lock the driver's door via the door lock
using the integrated key, or
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
> push down the locking knob on the front
passenger's door and close the door
from the outside.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Convenient operation
Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system* or convenience access*, you can also
operate the windows and the glass roof* via the
door lock.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks the
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
the retractable hardtop via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening from inside
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle when you drive away.
Driving tips
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid
opens unless it has been locked.
Controls
vehicle after a brief time if no door has
been opened.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening from outside
Automatic locking is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.<
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid.<
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1
Locking the luggage compartment lid
2
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
Mobility
Locking
Press the button, see arrow, or the
button on
the remote control for a longer period. The luggage compartment lid will open slightly. It can
now be swung upwards.
Reference
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Navigation
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and
cannot be unlocked using the central locking
system.
If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet parking, for example. Locking
the glove compartment, refer to page 104.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Coupe
Convertible
To close the luggage compartment lid,
press it down lightly. The lid is closed
automatically.<
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Alarm system*
The concept
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, otherwise injuries may result.<
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage compartment lid is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 33
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there is an interruption in the power
supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Press the
button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 27.
In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed*.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Convertible
Indicator lamp displays
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm system is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
> The indicator lamp under the inside rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
Controls
Driving tips
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Navigation
Panic mode*
Tilt alarm sensor
Communications Entertainment
You can open the luggage compartment lid
using the
button of the remote control even
if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 28.
The lid is locked and monitored again as soon
as it is closed.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the
button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
Reference
Arming and disarming
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.
Convenient access*
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<
Unlocking
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without needing to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
separately
> Starting the engine
> Convenient closing
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked when the vehicle detects
that the remote control currently in use is
outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is inside the vehicle.
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger's door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the
button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
For convenient closing, refer to page, touch the
surface continuously, arrow 2.
For convenient closing, refer to page 30, touch
the surface continuously, arrow 2.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above. You should therefore first
familiarize yourself with the instructions on
opening and closing starting on page 26.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Special features regarding the use of convenient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or retractable hardtop, the system is checking whether a
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing
the
button.
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 26.
Controls
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 55.
Driving tips
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition lock, refer to page 55.
2. Remove the cover.
Malfunction
4. Press the cover on to close.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition lock.
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Warning lamps
Take the old battery to a battery collection point or to your BMW center.<
Mobility
Convenient access may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this happens, open or close
the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the
engine afterward, insert the remote control into
the ignition lock.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
Reference
If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage
compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen.
The hazard warning flashers flash and an
acoustic signal* sounds.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Individually
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
Convenient operation
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27
or 30. For information on closing with convenient access, refer to Locking on page 28.
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not
close automatically.
Jointly
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels
into the raised position. The sliding visor
remains open.
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
Controls
Pinch protection system
Driving tips
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Navigation
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
After switching off the ignition
Communications Entertainment
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 27
or 30.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
Mobility
> Press the switch backwards past the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 213.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
opening provided. Move the glass roof in
the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable
hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your convertible:
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
> It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle
interior against unanticipated weather damage, it also offers theft protection. However,
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables
should only be stored in the locked cargo
bay.
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
5. Insert the Allen wrench* supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 213, into the
> Do not attach rack systems to the luggage
compartment lid, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated,
the luggage compartment lid swings back
and up. Before operating the retractable
hardtop, ensure that there is enough clearance, e.g. when parked in front of a wall.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g.
after driving in the rain, water may drip into
the cargo bay. If necessary, remove items
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not
drive off until the hardtop has stopped moving.<
1
Push button: open the retractable hardtop.
Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2
LEDs
Before opening and closing
The side windows move down when the
switch for hardtop operation is pulled or
pushed.<
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
LEDs
> Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded
down and engaged on both sides, refer to
page 108, otherwise it will not be possible
to open the retractable hardtop.
> Do not place any objects next to or on the
cargo bay partition and close the storage
compartment on the left side of the cargo
bay.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height
under the cargo bay partition; refer to the
label in the cargo bay showing a line indicating the maximum height.
> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is
closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level
ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a
lamp.
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left
LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as
the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the switch, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the
switch is pressed, the cargo bay partition is
folded up, the luggage compartment lid is
not closed, the vehicle is standing on a
strong incline or there is a malfunction. The
retractable hardtop cannot be moved.
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved
at temperatures below +147/–106. A
message appears on the Control Display.<
Navigation
Driving tips
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running.
Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
Controls
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio
readiness or beyond, refer to page 55:
Mobility
Do not place any objects on the retractable hardtop or on the luggage compartment lid, otherwise they could fall during movements of the retractable hardtop and cause
damage or injury.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the
rollover protection system is in the activated
position.
Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed may result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism while the
hardtop is opening or closing. Keep children
away from the swiveling area of the retractable
hardtop.<
Opening and closing
Reference
from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid
water stains or soiling.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening and closing
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the
switch.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or
closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing procedure several times in close succession as this
could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed, the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened and the windows cannot be
moved.<
Convenient operation with remote
control or via door lock
Refer to pages 28 and 30.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the
opening provided on the right side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the
protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the
opening provided on the left side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the hardtop is open and provides an even more
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective
cover in the cargo bay. Brief instructions for
operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protective cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the
right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 6 as far as the
symbol to insert the
left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflector.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the
range between the two symbols, otherwise the cable system inside the wind deflector
could be damaged.<
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for installation.
3. Turn the rotary handle to position
arrow 2.
,
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for
the holders of the wind deflector.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward
and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag
holders, you can fold the rear backrest down,
refer to page 109.
Navigation
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Driving tips
Controls
Folding
Loading function
Communications Entertainment
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the
vehicle even if the wind deflector has been
installed.
1. Lower all windows.
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 53.
Airbags
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 44.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard,
otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbags, otherwise serious injuries could result if the airbags
suddenly deployed.<
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
Safety belts, refer to page 47.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 88.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
4
Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints below.
Driving tips
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 44, and on damaged safety
belts on page 48.
Controls
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<
Lumbar support*
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
1
Longitudinal direction
2
Height
3
Angle
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Mobility
Electrical adjustment
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Thigh support
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Backrest width*
Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the
active head restraint reduces the distance to
the head.
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/
behind
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
that could impair the function of the active
head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will not be
ensured and its full potential in reducing the risk
of injury in the event of a rear collision may not
be realized.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the active head restraints, have the
testing, repair and removal executed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the
required explosives licenses. Unprofessional
attempts to work on the system could lead to
failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag
activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint
cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Height adjustment
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end
2 of the switch.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
Height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button downward.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Adjusting the distance to the back of
the head
Removing
Driving tips
Controls
Convertible front seats
> Back: press the button and push the head
cushion toward the rear.
Do not insert objects behind the head
cushion; otherwise, the head restraint
may not function properly.<
Entering the rear seats
Coupe
Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp:
Comes on when a seat backrest is not
engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
> Forward: pull up.
Mobility
Only remove the head restraints if no passengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers
in the rear.<
Reference
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Navigation
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise
there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected
movement.<
Heated seats*
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 55.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the
button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Call-up
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
Do not call up memory while you are driving, otherwise unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.<
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. "Last seat position auto."
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 55.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
If the
button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
Switching off automatic call-up
Deactivate "Last seat position automatic"
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Navigation
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
The function for automatically calling up
the last seat position is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 42.
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 55.
Communications Entertainment
Safety feature
Driving tips
Controls
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Reference
Convenience mode
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front
seats
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph
or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is
not fastened, if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt system, including any belt tensioners or childrestraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will function properly.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to
fasten your safety belt. When you close the
door and switch on radio readiness or the ignition, the belt hand-over extends automatically
and presents the safety belt in a position that is
convenient for fastening it around you. After
you have fastened your safety belt, the belt
hand-over retracts to its original position.
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety
belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start to drive.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt
hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger's seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is
occupied and after the front passenger's door is
closed.
Pinch protection system
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on
moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the
opposite direction and stops in this position. To
reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close
the door or switch the ignition off and on.
Although there is a pinch protection system, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it
cannot be ensured that the system will stop
moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.<
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
2
Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor*
3
Folding mirrors in and out*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
2. Engage reverse gear or transmission position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passenger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior and exterior mirrors*,
automatic dimming feature
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors manually or
with button 3 to prevent them from being damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<
Navigation
Adjustments
Communications Entertainment
1
Driving tips
Controls
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Mobility
Automatic heating
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
1. "Settings"
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
2. "MDrive"
The functions contained in MDrive are displayed:
> "Drivelogic:"
M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic: shift modes and Drivelogic drive
programs, refer to page 61
> "EDC:"
Electronic Damper Control EDC* programs, refer to page 83
MDrive*
> "DSC:"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 82
With MDrive you can configure several individual settings for your vehicle on the Control Display and activate them using the
button on
the steering wheel.
> "POWER:"
M Engine Dynamics Control programs,
refer to page 64
Configuring settings
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
> "Servotronic:"
Servotronic programs, refer to page 87
> "Shift lights:"
Shift Lights, refer to page 62
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. Select the desired function.
Resetting the settings
You can reset all MDrive settings to their default
values:
1. "Settings"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is selected.
4. "Reset"
Controls
2. "MDrive"
Activating the settings
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. The settings made
on the Control Display for the functions
in MDrive are active.
For the remote control currently in use, you can
set your preferred program for the M Engine
Dynamics Control, the Electronic Damper Control EDC and the Shift Lights. These presettings are called up when the engine is started.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after the button was pressed, MDrive was unable to
respond because the Antilock Brake System
ABS or Dynamic Stability Control DSC are currently regulating driving stability. Press the
button again when the indicator lamp is no
longer flashing.<
You can change individual settings outside of
MDrive even when MDrive is activated, e.g.
using the buttons on the center console. To
reactivate all settings made on the Control Display for MDrive: press the
button twice.
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is selected.
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
M Key settings
Mobility
"Unchanged" retains the current setting
made outside of MDrive.
Reference
5. "Yes"
Navigation
Driving tips
4. Select the desired setting.
Adjustments
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The available functions are displayed:
> "POWER:"
M Engine Dynamics Control programs,
refer to page 64
> "EDC:"
Electronic Damper Control* programs,
refer to page 83
> "Shift lights:"
Shift Lights, refer to page 62
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a childrestraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child-restraint system.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passenger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is limited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 44.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 89.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Observe the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be diminished.<
Standard child-restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
Controls
Driving tips
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Communications Entertainment
Children always in the rear
On the front passenger seat
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
Mobility
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
or improperly installed child-restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
The right place for children
Navigation
Transporting children safely
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Transporting children safely
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
For child-restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Coupe: placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the childrestraint system in the event of an accident.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.
Coupe: child-restraint system with
tether strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
3
Hook for upper retaining strap
4
Anchor
5
Rear window shelf
6
Seat backrest
7
Upper retaining strap of child-restraint system
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
Start/stop button
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock under special circumstances, refer to
page 34.
Radio readiness
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access*, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 34
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.<
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Manual transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the clutch is
depressed, the engine starts.
M dual clutch transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the brake is depressed,
the engine starts.<
Communications Entertainment
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Mobility
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Driving tips
Controls
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Reference
Ignition lock
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
To stop the starting procedure: press the start/
stop button again.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button.
The engine starts with the selector level in any
position. Driving off: with the engine running,
move the selector level from the middle position
Β in the desired direction.
Every time you start the engine, sequential
mode is activated in program S3 if you lightly
press the selector lever to the right to position
D/S with the brake pedal depressed.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, forcefully apply the parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral.
3. Press the start/stop button.
4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Press the start/stop button.
If N is engaged when you switch off the
engine, you are notified visually and acoustically.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55. This automatically engages transmission position P.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Releasing
Before driving into a car wash
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> When you remove the remote control from
the ignition lock
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
Transmission position P is engaged:
Navigation
4. Switch off the engine.
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
Communications Entertainment
3. Engage transmission position N.
Mobility
2. Depress the brake.
Reference
1. Insert the remote control, even with convenient access, into the ignition lock.
Controls
The vehicle is able to roll when you perform the
following steps:
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic*
The concept
The M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic
is an automated manual transmission with two
clutches and a partial transmission in which an
electro-hydraulic system takes over clutch
action and shifting.
With the M dual clutch transmission, gears are
changed without interruption of the traction
force.
The M dual clutch transmission is operated
using the selector lever and two shift paddles
on the steering wheel.
not continue driving until the transmission has
cooled down.
Avoid driving off frequently with high acceleration and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmission to overheat.
In traffic congestion or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to the information below.
Low Speed Assistant
The Low Speed Assistant supports you when
driving at very low speeds: the vehicle moves at
walking speed and automatically controls the
engine speed. You can also use the Low Speed
Assistant when rocking the vehicle out of deep
snow. To do so, shift between reverse gear and
the forward position without pressing the brake.
Activating
The transmission offers you the following functions:
1. Engage a drive position.
> Selection between manual or automatic
operation, sequential mode or drive mode
The vehicle rolls at the minimum speed.
> Selection between different drive programs, Drivelogic, refer to page 61
> Shift Lights, refer to page 62
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against selecting the wrong gear even in
sequential mode
> Launch Control, refer to page 63
> Automatic throttle blip
2. Briefly tap the accelerator.
Do not press the brake continuously as
this may cause the transmission to overheat.<
Deactivating
Brake the vehicle to a stop to deactivate the
Low Speed Assistant.
Selector lever positions
> Low Speed Assistant
System limitations
The M dual clutch transmission is equipped
with an overheating protection system that protects the clutch against extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow
when the transmission becomes too
warm. Avoid high engine loads and
driving off frequently. When the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up red and
the fuel supply to the engine is cut off. You can-
> R: reverse gear
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position. The selector lever locks in
position R.
The transmission position currently engaged is
indicated in the instrument cluster and by LEDs
on the selector lever.
Shiftlock
When the vehicle is stationary, press the brake
pedal before shifting out of N, otherwise the
desired gear will not be engaged.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
If the driving situation demands, e.g. when
downshifting on a slippery road, the M dual
clutch transmission automatically disengages
and engages the clutch.
N engages when you open the driver's
door while the engine is running, your
safety belt is not fastened and you activate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator. To
drive off after closing the driver's door and fastening your safety belt, move the selector lever
to position N first and then to the desired drive
position.<
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off if you leave the remote
control in the ignition lock. This function can be
used in an automatic car wash, for example,
refer to page 57.<
Shift back to sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or press the
selector level to the right in the D/S direction
again.
On a level road, you can drive off in second gear,
e.g. on slippery roads.
The M dual clutch transmission assists you in
the following situations:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle stops, the transmission
automatically shifts down to first gear.
> Shortly before the vehicle slows down to
below the minimum speed of the gear currently engaged, the transmission automatically shifts down without requiring your
intervention.
Rapid downshifting: in sequential mode, you
can skip several gears to achieve optimal acceleration. To do so, press the accelerator past the
resistance point and pull the left shift paddle
once or press the selector lever forward once.
D drive mode
In drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.
Shift from drive mode to sequential mode: shift
using the shift paddles or the selector lever, or
press the selector level to the right in the D/S
direction.
Shift back to drive mode: press the selector
lever to the right in the D/S direction again.
Kick-down: to accelerate rapidly, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator down past the
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Push or pull the selector lever in the required
direction to engage the desired transmission
position.
Shift from sequential mode to drive mode:
press the selector lever to the right in the D/S
direction.
Driving tips
> D/S: change between drive mode and
sequential mode
Navigation
> –: shift down manually
Shift up or down using the shift paddles or the
selector lever. You do not need to lift your foot
off the accelerator when doing so.
Communications Entertainment
> +: shift up manually
S sequential mode
Mobility
> N: neutral
Reference
> Β: middle position
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
resistance point. This provides maximum acceleration.
Via the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
P Park
P engages automatically when you switch
off the engine unless N is engaged and
the remote control remains in the ignition lock,
refer to page 55. As soon as you remove the
remote control from the ignition lock, P
engages regardless of the position of the selector lever.<
Displays in the instrument cluster
> To shift up, pull the right-hand shift paddle
+ briefly.
> To shift down, pull the left-hand shift paddle
– briefly.
Unlocking the transmission lock
manually
1
Engaged gear 1 to 7, R, N, P
2
Selected drive program,
corresponds to the number of illuminated
fields, refer to Drivelogic, page 61
3
The gear currently engaged is displayed
together with a D in drive mode
At very low outside temperatures, this display
may not be functional. The engaged driving
direction is indicated by the LEDs on the selector lever.
Changing gears
Via the selector lever
> To shift up, pull back the selector lever.
If a power failure occurs, e.g. if the battery
is discharged or disconnected, the transmission lock must be released manually, otherwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.<
Release the transmission lock manually for towing only and forcefully apply the parking brake
beforehand to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission
lock again.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Push the black cover forward using the
screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer
to page 213.
> To shift down, push it forward.
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
from sequential to drive mode, drive program 3
is active.
In drive mode
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Selecting the drive program via the
button in the center console
5. Pull the screwdriver back all the way, arrow
2. The transmission lock is released.
6. Carefully remove the screwdriver, for example to avoid accidentally engaging the
transmission lock during towing.
After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission lock again. Otherwise there is a
danger of the vehicle rolling.<
Locking
1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever and press forward.
The transmission lock is locked again.
2. Fold back the black cover until it engages
audibly.
3. Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back
into place.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
drive program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 60.
Selecting the drive program via the
button on the steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred drive program via the
button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 50.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 223.
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
Drivelogic
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Various drive programs are available to you via
Drivelogic.
1. "Settings"
After every change between sequential and
drive mode, the program selected last in each
case is active. Exception: after the first change
Driving tips
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
Navigation
Program 6 is available when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated, refer to page 82. If DSC
is activated, the program changes from 6 to 5.
Communications Entertainment
You can choose between six drive programs,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporty
puristic 6.
2. "MDrive"
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
4. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever, arrow 1.
Mobility
In sequential mode
Controls
Five drive programs are available for selection,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporting and
highly dynamic 5.
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. Select "Drivelogic:".
4. Turn the controller to set the drive mode or
sequential mode.
"Unchanged" retains the current settings
made outside of MDrive.
5. Press the controller to select the drive programs.
6. Turn the controller to set the drive program.
7. Press the controller.
Shift Lights
To achieve the best possible acceleration in
sequential mode when using a sporty driving
style, the Shift Lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the best shift point just before the maximum engine speed is reached.
1. As the vehicle approaches its maximum
engine speed, the yellow LEDs 1 light up
consecutively to indicate the impending
shift point.
2. At the latest, shift when the red LEDs 2 light
up.
The LEDs flash when the maximum allowable
engine speed is reached. When the maximum
engine speed is exceeded, the fuel supply is cut
off to protect the engine. Avoid engine speeds
in this range at all costs.
Switching the Shift Lights on/off
For operating principle, refer to page 71.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the symbol appears in the display accompanied by
the word "SET".
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for at least 6 miles/10 km.
1. Press the brake while the engine is running.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
4. With the vehicle stationary, press the selector lever forward and hold. A flag symbol
appears in the instrument cluster.
5. Press the accelerator down all the way. The
engine speed when driving off is controlled.
4. Use button 1 to select:
>
Shift Lights activated.
>
Shift Lights deactivated.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the status set for the remote control in use is active, refer to M Key settings on
page 51.
You can set and call up the preferred status
of the Shift Lights via the MDrive, refer to
page 50.
Brightness of Shift Lights
The brightness of the Shift Lights can be set
using the brightness level of the instrument
cluster, refer to Instrument lighting on page 94.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables you to drive off with an
optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road
surface.
Do not use Launch Control too often, as
the higher loads on the vehicle lead to
premature component wear.<
> Increase the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: press the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 1.
> Decrease the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: pull the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 2.
> Reset the drive-off engine speed: press
the lever upward or downward, arrows 3.
7. The vehicle accelerates when you release
the selector lever. Keep the accelerator
pressed all the way down.
8. The transmission shifts up automatically as
long as the accelerator is pressed all the
way down.
Launch Control only becomes available again
after a certain distance has been driven.
Do not use Launch Control during the vehicle
break-in period, refer to page 116.
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
5. Press button 2.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
6. If you wish, you can adjust the drive-off
engine speed by up to approx. 500 rpm:
Reference
3. Press button 2.
Driving tips
3. Select sequential mode with Drivelogic
drive program 6.
Controls
2. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC,
refer to page 83.
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
M Engine Dynamics Control
With M Engine Dynamics Control you can influence how sportily your vehicle should respond
to movements of the accelerator. Three programs are available to you.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
"Normal" program
In the "Normal" program, the engine responds
gently to accelerator movements, which is ideal
for city traffic or on snow, for example.
"Sport" program
The "Sport" program provides for a more spontaneous response of the engine to accelerator
movements.
1
High beams
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Turn signals
"Sport Plus" program
Using turn signals
In the "Sport Plus" program, the engine
responds to accelerator movements with high
spontaneity and uncompromising sportiness.
The "Sport Plus" program can only be activated
via MDrive, refer to MDrive on page 50.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Selecting a program
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
Press the POWER button to switch between
the "Normal" and "Sport" programs.
For the programs "Sport" and "Sport Plus", the
LED in the POWER button lights up.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 50.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the program set for the remote
control in use is active, refer to M Key settings
on page 51.
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. "Triple turn signal"
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Switching on wipers
2
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3
Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor*
4
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5
Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Press once.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Normal wiper speed
Mobility
1
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Wiper system
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Driving tips
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
Controls
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the container.<
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
1
Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2
Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
3
Deactivating cruise control
4
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster. This function is
not available when DSC is switched off.
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> When you shift or depress the clutch
> Each time the lever is pressed lightly to the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerate slightly, increase speed steadily:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate strongly, increase speed in intervals
of 10:
> When you deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
When the ignition is switched off, the stored
speed value is cleared and can no longer be
called up.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
1
Stored speed
2
Selected speed is displayed briefly
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
Mobility
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
Controls
> When you brake the vehicle
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
Driving tips
Increasing desired speed
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
Navigation
Deactivating cruise control
Communications Entertainment
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If engine braking power is
insufficient on a downhill grade, the stored
speed may be exceeded.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
and shaded roads, for example, otherwise there
is an increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
1
Knob in the instrument cluster
2
Outside temperature and clock, refer to
Computer on page 69
3
Odometer and trip odometer
If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 71.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 74.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above Select the symbol. +377/+36.
You should therefore drive carefully on bridges
The prewarning field, arrow 1, and the red warning field, arrow 2, change in relation to the
engine temperature. The permissible engine
speed increases with increased engine temperature. Avoid engine speeds in the prewarning
field, if possible.
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Engine oil temperature
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 1757/806 and approx. 2507/
1206.
Calling up information
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:
Controls
Check coolant level, refer to page 206.
Reserve
Driving tips
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Navigation
Coolant temperature
You can find information on refueling on
page 194.
Communications Entertainment
Never drive at engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the engine speed is limited to
protect the engine.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Oil level, refer to Checking oil level on
page 203
> Average fuel consumption
> Speed
> No information
M dual clutch transmission:
Outside temperature, time, cruising
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/
63 liters.
Mobility
> Cruising range
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
range, oil level, average fuel consumption and
speed appear in the top display.<
Displays on the "Onboard info":
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if:
Average fuel consumption
> A distance was manually entered into
the computer, refer to information
below.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
> A destination was entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 127.
You can have the average consumption for
another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2 seconds.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Resetting the Trip computer
3. Select
1. "Vehicle Info"
> "Reset" all values are reset
2. "Trip computer"
> "Automatically reset" all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the engine is
switched off
Controls
Settings and information
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3
When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 94
4
Calling up Check Control 76
Button for:
5
Setting the time 74
> Confirming selected display or set values
6
Setting the date 75
7
Viewing service requirement display 72
> Calling up computer information 69
8
Switching Shift Lights* on/off 62
Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
Units of measure
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
Mobility
2
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
1
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Operating principle
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Button for selecting functions
6
Rear brake pads
2
Service requirements
7
Brake fluid
3
Engine oil
4
Roadworthiness test*
5
Front brake pads
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up detailed information about the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
2. "Vehicle status"
Communications Entertainment
1
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Possible displays
Symbols
The service deadline has already passed.
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
Mobility
No service is currently required.
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 75, otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Service required"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Date below.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 207.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
Driving tips
Controls
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
2. "Settings"
4. "Format:"
5. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Communications Entertainment
Setting the time format
Navigation
The time is stored.
Setting the date
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to "Format:" below.
Mobility
In the instrument cluster
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. "Format:"
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. A Check Control message
involves the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster, an acoustic signal if applicable, and text messages on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
Indicator and warning lamps
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
2. "Time/Date"
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur
at the same time, they are displayed in succession.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
Navigation
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Move the controller to the left.
Hiding Check Control messages
Driving tips
Explanatory text messages
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on.
It is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
Communications Entertainment
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can view the Check Control
messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Controls
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Mobility
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. "Check Control"
Applying your current speed as the
limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
After the warning, you are only alerted to reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle
speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or
5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
4. Press the controller.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit warning"
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit:"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
Warning signal volume
You can raise or lower the volume of the warning signals, e.g. the 'fasten safety belt'
reminder, relative to the entertainment sound
output. The warning signals have a fixed minimum and maximum volume that cannot be
dropped below or exceeded.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Controls
Settings on the Control
Display
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control
> "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.
for the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output
2. "Language/Units"
Brightness of Control Display
3. "Speech mode:"
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
4. Select the desired dialog.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
Communications Entertainment
4. Select the desired language.
Navigation
Driving tips
3. "Volume settings"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
2. "Central display"
Everything under control
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visible.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, otherwise physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear. Wait this
short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunctioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Malfunction
Driving tips
> if you are driving parallel to a wall.
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. To measure the distance,
there are four ultrasonic sensors in the
bumpers.
Navigation
The concept
Communications Entertainment
> if you stop in front of an object that has been
detected by only one of the corner sensors
Mobility
Park Distance Control PDC*
Reference
Technology for driving comfort and safety
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Technology for driving comfort and safety
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 117.
gitudinal and lateral acceleration when driving
on dry surfaces, yet with reduced driving stability. Only at the absolute limit of stability does
the system intervene to stabilize the vehicle by
reducing engine power and applying the brakes
on the wheels. In such situations, additional
corrective steering maneuvers may be necessary.
M Dynamic Mode is switched off every time the
engine is restarted.
When the M Dynamic Mode is on, stabilizing measures are performed to a limited
degree only. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
the DSC activated and the
M Dynamic Mode deactivated whenever possible.<
Brake assist
Activating MDM
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Press the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive* on page 50. The MDM indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if you
previously selected the M Dynamic Mode MDM
in MDrive.
Electronic brake-force distribution
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC optimizes driving stability and traction. In
addition, the system recognizes unstable driving situations such as understeering and oversteering, and helps keep the vehicle on a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
power and applying the brakes on individual
wheels.
When the ignition is on, you can set the
M Dynamic Mode via MDrive on the Control
Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
3. "DSC:"
4. Select "M Dynamic Mode".
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
M Dynamic Mode MDM*
M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the Dynamic
Stability Control DSC that permits greater lon82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
The indicator lamp goes out briefly after
the engine is started.
If the indicator lamp lights up:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
The indicator lamp lights up permanently and the DSC indicator lamp
flashes: M Dynamic Mode is controlling the drive and braking forces.
Deactivating DSC
Electronic Damper Control
EDC*
The concept
Whenever there is a change in any significant
parameter such as road surface quality or in an
operating condition such as steering, braking,
etc., the damping automatically adjusts to the
new conditions in fractions of a second.
You can select between three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want comfort-oriented control of the shock absorbers.
Press the DSC OFF button for longer than
approx. 1 second; the indicator lamps for DSC
in the instrument cluster light up. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
You may find it useful to briefly deactivate DSC
under the following exceptional circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers control that is balanced between comfort and sportiness.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consistently sporty control of the shock absorbers.
Selecting a program
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
Controls
For better control
Driving tips
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive and braking forces.
Navigation
For better control
Press the
button on the steering wheel
again; the MDM indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Communications Entertainment
Deactivating MDM
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> When driving with snow chains
Mobility
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off.
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Press the DSC OFF button again; the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Technology for driving comfort and safety
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
System limitations
Each time the engine is started, the program set
for the remote control in use is active, refer to M
Key settings on page 51.
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 50.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circumference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. This change is detected
and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each
time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
3. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is
moving, without any feedback.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire inflation pressures are correct.
The initialization is completed during the trip.
"Flat Tire Monitor active" is displayed again on
the Control Display.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify the damaged tire. To do so, check
the tire pressure using the M Mobility System, refer to Producing the tire inflation
pressure on page 219.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility System, refer to page 218.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has
a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sudden severe tire damage caused by outside influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics has been
mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the
same radio frequency.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the wheels represents the status of
the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures
change while the vehicle is being driven. The
tire pressures do not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
6. Start to drive.
Communications Entertainment
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.
Mobility
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
Reference
3. "Reset"
Controls
2. "Vehicle status"
Driving tips
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
1. "Vehicle Info"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Technology for driving comfort and safety
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires. A message appears on the
Control Display.
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, the reset is continued automatically. The indicator lamp goes out after the
system reset is completed.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
3. "Reset TPM"
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to
Message for low tire inflation pressure on
page 86.
The message "Resetting TPM..." appears
on the Control Display for several seconds.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the Control
Display, the tires are shown in green and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are
displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is
shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
3. Start to drive.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the
target values to be monitored. The system
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the wheels are shown in gray and a message
appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has
been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Display. The system is not reset after a
tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 86.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Controls
Driving tips
Malfunction
Navigation
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop that is informed in the handling of
TPM and that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Communications Entertainment
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility System, refer to page 217.
Mobility
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, identify the damaged wheel on the vehicle.
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
Servotronic
The concept
"Servotronic" varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels as a function of the speed at
which you are driving.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Technology for driving comfort and safety
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
At low speeds, steering is assisted strongly, i.e.
less effort is required to turn the vehicle. Steering assistance lessens with increasing speed.
Brake force display
You can select between two programs*.
"Normal" program
Select the "Normal" program if you want comfort-oriented steering, e.g. in city traffic or when
parking.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consistently sporty steering.
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Selecting a program
You can set and call up your preferred program via MDrive, refer to page 50.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1
Front airbags
2
Coupe: head airbags
3
Head airbags
4
Side airbags in the seat backrests
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and windows on the front
passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments or
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 53.
The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows
whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child-restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehicle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
Status of front passenger airbags
Mobility
Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Reference
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Technology for driving comfort and safety
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on accident severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
As of radio readiness, refer to page 55, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
3. Release the locking lever.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.<
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a critical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protection bar.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Never move the retractable hardtop when
the rollover protection system is in the
activated position.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless longterm operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 72.<
Lamps
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
Automatic headlamp control*
0
Lamps off,
daytime running lamps
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 93. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lamps to low
beams.
1
Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2
Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3
Automatic headlamp control*, daytime running lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive
Head Light*
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
When you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Welcome lamps
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the lefthand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 94.<
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. "Welcome light"
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
2. "Lighting"
Controls
3. "Daytime running lamps"
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
Adaptive Head Light*
2. "Lighting"
The concept
3. "Pathway lighting:"
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
4. Set or deactivate the duration.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
Daytime running lamps
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 92.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
The daytime running lamps light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are active and switched on on
both sides.
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Setting or deactivating the duration
Communications Entertainment
Daytime running lamps are activated and
are stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Mobility
If you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the car, with the lamps switched off, the low
beams and the rear lamps come on and remain
on for a certain time.
Reference
Pathway lighting
Driving tips
Welcome lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Lamps
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Malfunction
Instrument lighting
The LED next to the symbol for automatic headlamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word
"SET".
1
High beams
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Roadside parking lamps*
2. Press button 2.
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry
lamps*, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 55.<
Driving tips
Controls
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
Navigation
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* permanently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Communications Entertainment
Reading lamps
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Climate
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Climate
1
Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
2
Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 99
11 Residual heat
3
Air to the footwell
12 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
4
Air distribution, manual
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
5
Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
14 Rear window defroster
6
Maximum cooling
7
AUTO program
8
Air flow rate, manual
9
Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/
Recirculated-air mode
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
Comfortable interior climate
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment
is deactivated.
The current setting is briefly displayed on the
Control Display when a button is pressed.
You can switch the automatic air distribution
back on by pressing the AUTO button. This
automatically switches on the cooling function
as well.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow rate and your temperature specifications
will be adapted to outside influences as a result
of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window
condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the
intensity of the AUTO program. The current
setting is displayed on the Control Display
when the button is pressed.
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures individually for the driver's and front
passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
You can achieve maximum heating power with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Select the intensity of the AUTO program:
>
Low
>
Medium
>
High
Mobility
When you switch between different temperature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have
enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
Driving tips
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 26.
Navigation
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
The automatic climate control goes into recirculated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
Communications Entertainment
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.
Controls
Maximum cooling
Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the
hardtop is open and the AUTO program is
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Automatic climate control
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Climate
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
switched on. In the Convertible program, the
automatic air conditioning system is optimized
for driving with the top open. In addition, the air
flow rate is increased as vehicle speed
increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible program can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce airflow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode for the
air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the automatic climate control. All displays are cleared
except for the rear window defroster if it is
switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate
control.
The recirculated-air mode is switched on
when you switch off the automatic climate control. If the air quality deteriorates or the
window fogs over, switch the system back on
and increase the air volume.<
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air. If necessary, the system blocks the supply of outside air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the
quality of the air inside the car will gradually
deteriorate.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recirculated-air mode and the previous mode using an
individually programmable button on the steering wheel, refer to page 50.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> While the engine is at operating temperature
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 77 7/
25 6
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distribution.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
Ventilation in the rear
The cooling function helps prevent condensation on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
1
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna
and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temperature
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2
Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open
and close the air vents
3
Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
1
Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2
Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
3
Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Controls
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Navigation
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available while the engine is
running.
Draft-free ventilation
Communications Entertainment
Switching cooling function on/off
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
It is ready for use at any outside temperature
during parked car operation.
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and
front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Ventilation for cooling
Reference
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Climate
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on
times can be preselected. The system can also
be switched on and off directly.
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
Switching on/off directly
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
1. "Settings"
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Controls
Programming
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
Memory buttons
2
LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 102.
1
Communications Entertainment
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.
Driving tips
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
Mobility
The concept
Reference
Integrated universal remote
control*
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched off.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Digital compass*
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
Adjustment button
2
Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the compass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Driving tips
1
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
Controls
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
Coupe:
Roller sun blind*
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable
hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph or 7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
Tap the button in the center console to raise or
lower the roller sun blind.
Glove compartment
Opening
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop
fully and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to righthand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to
page 26.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the
outside, the glove compartment is locked as
well.
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Settings*
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 164.
Slide the center armrest into the desired position on the driver's side.
Observe the following when connecting:
Connection for external audio device
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering column*, in the front doors and in the center console*.
There are nets on the front-seat backrests.
Storage compartments in the rear
console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment version, the following storage compartments can
be found in the rear console:
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
> Storage tray
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter*, depending on the equipment version. For more information about this
mobile phone base plate refer to the separate
Owner's Manual.
> USB-audio interface*, refer to page 166
Navigation
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 165
Communications Entertainment
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
Driving tips
USB interface for data transmission
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Storage compartment with cover
Closing
> Cup holders
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cup holder.
Coupe: clothes hooks
Rear*
There are two additional cup holders in the rear
console.
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, otherwise they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cup holders, otherwise damage could result.<
Press the button to open.
Before folding down the rear seat backrest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cup holder and close it. Do
not place objects into the cup holder and do not
use force to close it. Do not use the cup holder
as a grab handle.<
Ashtray, front
Opening
Front
Push the ridge on the cover.
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Ashtray, rear
Emptying
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Connecting electrical
appliances
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the center armrest
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
External audio device, refer to page 105.
Navigation
Lighter
Communications Entertainment
Lift out the insert.
Driving tips
Controls
Opening
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Coupe: socket in the cargo bay*
When returning the backrest into its seating position, make sure that the seat's
locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event
of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets* or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 119.
Open the cap.
Coupe:
Through-loading system
Convertible:
Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo bay
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the
cargo bay:
To do so, push the cargo bay partition upward.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo bay
partition down until it engages on both sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that
there are no objects on or next to the
cargo bay partition, otherwise parts of the hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in the
cargo bay showing a line indicating the maximum height. Do not use force to push down the
cargo bay partition.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened if the cargo bay partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both
sides.<
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright position and engage it.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you
will find two bag holders on the cargo bay wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the button.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the
holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other
suitable objects from the holders, otherwise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead
to a safety hazard due to objects flying about
the passenger compartment. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been
appropriately secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle,
refer to page 118.
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jackets, depending on vehicle equipment version
> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g. shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
Controls
Storage compartments inside
the cargo bay
Navigation
When the rear seat backrest is folded
down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage
compartment, otherwise braking maneuvers
and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to
objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<
Communications Entertainment
Bag holder*
A storage compartment is located behind the
rear seat backrest. To access the storage compartment: remove the insert or fold down the
rear seat backrest.
Mobility
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to
transport light objects in the rear without damaging the seats. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the mounting points for the cargo
bay net* are found on the back of the seat backrest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the
button on the driver's or the opposite side.
Storage compartment behind the rear
seat backrest
Reference
Folding down the rear seat backrest
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Convertible
Loading
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
1. Take out the filler piece.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
> Storage compartment on the left side of the
cargo bay. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Rubber strap* for subdividing the cargo
bay; can be hooked onto the lateral lashing
eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage compartment under the floor panel, otherwise damage could result.<
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap
into the eyelet.
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the
catch.
Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the opening at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 119.
Securing cargo
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/
2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
2. Front cover: press the two recesses
together and fold the cover down until it
engages.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW center.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag*
3. In the cargo bay: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you
can remove the insert and use the transport bag
with the regular through-loading opening. To
transport larger objects, you can fold down the
rear seat backrest to create an expanded
through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a
length of up to 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m. When skis of 6 ft
2 in/1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the transport bag is reduced due to its
tapered design.
Controls
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out
the transport bag between the front seats.
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
Communications Entertainment
Removing the ski bag
1. For loading using the regular through-loading opening:
Press the button down and remove the
insert from the front.
For loading with the through-loading opening expanded:
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 109.
Mobility
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Loading
Reference
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Practical interior accessories
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap
into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases
access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap
sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport
bag if you do not need its full length.
Removing the front cover
You can remove the front cover to use the full
height of the through-loading opening. With the
cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow,
and remove the cover toward the front. To
replace, insert the cover at an angle from above
and let it snap it into place.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 113 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 5,500 rpm and a
road speed of 105 mph/170 km/h.
Do not depress the accelerator all the way.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
Engine and road speeds can be increased gradually up to a traveling speed of 135 mph/
220 km/h. Use the maximum speed only for
brief intervals, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The transmission begins functioning at an optimal level only after a distance of approx.
300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed engine
speeds of 5,500 rpm during this period.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Clearance
Mind the limited clearance of the BMW
M3, e.g. when driving into underground
parking garages or over obstacles. If equipped
with EDC*, select the "Sport" program, refer to
page 83, when driving off curbs to keep clearance as even as possible. Otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged.<
Close the luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage compartment lid is closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of
the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage
compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to
page 98.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust system, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 84.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system.
M dual clutch transmission: never drive
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine
braking action will not be present or there will be
no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
engine braking action will not be present or
there will be no power assistance to the brakes
or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Controls
Driving tips
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
Navigation
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 199.
Hills
Communications Entertainment
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Hydroplaning
Driving in wet conditions
Reference
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes, e.g.
when loading the cargo bay, otherwise there is a
risk of burn injuries.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Things to remember when driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Determining loading limit
This can also lead to a permanent loss in ride
comfort and to squealing noises during braking.
A loss in comfort can also be caused by
extended braking with little pressure on the
pedal.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
For information on brake system technology,
refer to Compound brake on page 121.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately
result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.<
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Securing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Coupe
Convertible: before opening the hardtop,
fold down the cargo bay partition. Make
sure the cargo bay is loaded correctly, otherwise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer
to page 108.<
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo bay net* or draw
straps*.
Convertible
> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are
provided for attaching the cargo straps.
Two are located on the cargo bay
sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo
bay panel 2.
Please comply with the information supplied with the cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 231, as excessive loads can pose a
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Stowing cargo
Navigation
Driving tips
Convertible
Mobility
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.
Controls
Coupe
Reference
Load
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Things to remember when driving
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 54, otherwise these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack*
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the luggage
compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid taking corners rapidly
and sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers.
A luggage rack mounted on the roof
changes vehicle aerodynamics and handling. Exercise restraint when driving with a
roof-mounted luggage rack to avoid the risk of
an accident.<
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 231.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
BMW M3 engineering
Compound brake
The high-revving V8 engine draws a maximum
power of 420 hp/309 kW and a peak torque of
295 lb ft/400 Nm from a displacement of
244 cu in/4 liters. Its spontaneous response
results in a very wide effective rpm range. The
maximum engine speed lies at 8,400 rpm and is
electronically controlled. Due to the high engine
dynamics, the maximum engine speed is limited to 7,000 rpm when the vehicle is standing.
Your BMW M3 is equipped with a high-performance brake system with perforated compound brake discs.
To keep the brake system in optimal condition,
it is advisable to apply the brakes at regular
intervals as appropriate for the character of the
vehicle.
For technical reasons, the exhaust system
sounds slightly metallic when the engine is
cold.
Refer also to Corrosion on brake rotors on
page 117.
For further information on warming up the
engine, refer to Tachometer on page 68 and
Engine oil temperature on page 69.
Drive train
In your BMW M3, special emphasis was placed
on the direct connection between the engine
and drive. The torsionally rigid execution of the
drive train results in acoustic feedback of the
torque, as is typical in sports cars. Clacking
sounds can arise during load changes. They do
not impair functionality or shorten the lifespan
of any component.
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
During the warm-up phase, the high-performance V8 engine runs a little more roughly due
to its emissions control system.
Mobility
Braking correctly
Reference
Warming up the engine
Due to special design features of the perforated
compound brake discs, operating noise is audible during braking. However, this does not
affect the brake's performance, safe operation
or stability under load.
Driving tips
Controls
High performance V8 engine
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
BMW M3 engineering
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Driving on a race track
BMW recommends the following measures
before driving on a race track:
> Participate in a BMW driver training course
> Have the vehicle checked by your BMW
center
Operation on race tracks results in a
higher rate of wear. The BMW M3 is not
designed for use in competitive motorsports.
This wear is not covered by the vehicle warranty.<
The series brake pads and wear indicator are
not designed for operation on a race track. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 123 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation system
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Navigation system*
General information
Removing navigation DVD
With the help of satellites, the navigation system is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.
The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and
can be updated using navigation DVDs.
Make all entries while the vehicle is stationary
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary,
and always give priority to the applicable traffic
regulations in the event of any contradiction
between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.<
1.
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
Updating the navigation data
The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and
can be updated using a navigation DVD. Please
contact the BMW center if you have any questions.
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the navigation DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Displaying information on the version
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version". Information
on the data version is displayed.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
> Entering a destination manually, see below
Controls
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 129
> Last destinations, refer to Last destinations,
page 130
> Entering a destination by voice commands*, refer to page 133
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Entering a destination
manually
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
locality if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the displayed town/city, or select letters.
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so
that stored names can be called up quickly.
The system also supports you with the following features:
Navigation
> Selecting home address, refer to page 130
Communications Entertainment
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 132
Driving tips
> Special destinations, refer to page 130
Destination entry
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select
then press the controller.
1. Change to the list of street names.
, and
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select
, and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
2. Move the controller to the right.
3. Select the name of the town/city from the
list. The three destinations stored last are
displayed.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the specified state/province are
offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. "Find streets in" the state/province currently displayed.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the displayed town/city.
2. Select the
symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code. A preview map is
displayed in the assistance window.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street. A preview map is displayed in the assistance window.
9. Select the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
1. Open "Options".
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Selection after destination entry
To create contacts, refer to page 183.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if necessary, using "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. "Start guidance"
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in "My Contacts""
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in "My Contacts""
Storing a destination in the address
book
Editing or deleting an address
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
2. "Address book"
1. "Navigation"
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Address book
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
Communications Entertainment
If a new town/city is selected during destination
guidance, the current destination guidance is
terminated.
Mobility
> "Points of Interest at dest."
refer to page 130.
Reference
> "Route preference"
refer to page 137.
Driving tips
Controls
> "Start guidance".
Destination guidance is started immediately.
Destination entry
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. Highlight the entry.
Editing a destination
4. Open "Options".
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
1. "Navigation"
Using home address as destination
2. "Last destinations"
The home address must be stored as a destination. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 183.
3. Highlight the destination.
1. "Navigation"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
2. "Address book"
Deleting the last destinations
3. "Home address"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".
Special destinations
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
You can search for special destinations, e.g.
hotels and places of interest, and start destination guidance to this location.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of navigation data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
1. "Search destination"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search" after the criteria have been
defined.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
> Special destinations "At destination",
"At a different destination", "Along
route" are listed according to their distance from the location where the search
is being performed.
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.
3. Highlight the special destination. The destination is displayed in the preview map.
3. "Route Points of Interest"*
4. Select the special destination.
Category details
Additional details can be displayed for some
special destinations, e.g. Italian restaurants.
1. "Points of Interest"
2. "Category details"
5. Select the
symbol. Destination guidance to the special destination is started.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Name, A-Z search"
2. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a maximum of 100 entries.
3. Change to the list of special destinations.
4. Highlight the special destination. The destination is displayed in the preview map.
Driving tips
> "At destination"
> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map display as symbols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
Navigation
> "At current location"
Communications Entertainment
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
> Special destinations "At current location" are listed according to their distance from the current location and are
displayed with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.
Controls
2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.
symbol to start destination
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
6. Select the
guidance.
Mobility
5. Select the special destination.
Destination entry
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. "Navigation"
Selecting the destination
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
1. Select the
is started.
4. "Display Points of Interest"
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination via
the map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Display. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
symbol. The interactive map
> Turn the controller: change the scale.
> Move the controller in one direction:
move the map.
> First move the controller and turn it at
the same time: move the map diagonally
to select a destination in one of the four
regions.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items:
> Select the
guidance.
symbol: start destination
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street or town/
city, it displays a street name in the vicinity or
the coordinates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
5. Say the name of the destination state/province in the language of the voice activation
system.
Entering a town/city
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The methods of entry depend on the navigation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 130.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice activation system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice activation system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Voice commands}.<
Entering an address
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
2. {Enter address}
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for a particular part of the address.
4. Say the particular part of the address,
e.g. {State}
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recognize the town/city.
The system can suggest up to 20 destinations
that meet your entries. Up to 7 entries at a time
appear on the Control Display.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry ...}
> To re-enter the town/city: {New
entry}
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as a complete
word
The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
activation system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
Navigation
> "View in northern direction"
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
Communications Entertainment
> "Exit interactive map"
Spelling the destination
Mobility
symbol: start destination
Reference
> Select the
guidance.
Controls
The destination town/city can be spelled or
entered as a complete word*.
Destination entry
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Example: to enter a destination in a state/province as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and
avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system may suggest multiple destinations that meet your entries.
Trip planner
The trip planner can be used to plan a trip with
several legs to different destinations.
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate "Trip with several dest.".
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry ...}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell city}
Identical-sounding towns/cities that cannot be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
4. "Trip list".
Entering street and house number
2. "Enter address using:"
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination town/city.
5. "New trip"
Entering intermediate destinations
1. "Enter first dest. in the trip", if applicable,
"Another destination in the trip"
3. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
To enter the house number:
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
The destination is added to the destination list
and is displayed in the list of last destinations.
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted: "As first destination", "As last destination" or "Insert
within list".
5. If applicable, select "Another destination in
the trip".
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Starting the trip
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
After entering all of the intermediate destinations, open a stored trip directly via "Start guidance" or via "Trip list".
Opening the trip list
Storing a trip
1. "Trip planner"
In the trip planner, created trips can be stored in
the trip list.
2. "Yes"
Controls
3. Enter the letters.
Importing trips
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
A maximum of 30 trips with at most
50 intermediate destinations per trip can be
stored.
Changing the trip direction
Connect the USB device to the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Reverse order of trip dest."
2. "Trip planner"
Navigation
1. "Trip list"
1. "Navigation"
3. "Yes"
4. "Trip list"
5. Highlight the trip.
Arranging the order of intermediate
destinations
6. Open "Options".
This function is not available for imported trips.
8. "USB device" or "BMW Search"*
1. "Trip entry"
9. "OK"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
7. Select "Import trip".
3. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
Terminating trip planning
4. Move the intermediate destination to
another position in the list.
1. "Navigation"
Deleting an intermediate destination
To return to the direct entry of destinations:
2. Open "Options".
3. Deactivate "Trip with several dest.".
This function is not available for imported trips.
1. "Trip entry"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Trip list"
2. Select the desired trip.
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data
stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant
response. The benefits for you include:
3. Open "Options".
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list. This function is not
available for imported trips.
Driving tips
4. Select a trip.
Mobility
2. "Store trip"
3. "Trip list"
Reference
1. Open "Options".
The stored trips are listed in alphabetical order
in the trip list.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Destination entry
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identification.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or
unregistered names is impossible.
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Changing route criteria
2. "Enter address"
1. "Navigation"
3. Select the destination.
2. "Map"
4. "Start guidance"
3. "Route preference"
After the route is calculated, the route is displayed in the map on the Control Display.
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Short route": short distance, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be
2. "Map"
symbol
> "Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached at the end of
the last trip, the system asks whether it should
continue destination guidance.
Select "Resume guidance" or "Stop guidance".
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during destination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal experience.
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways"
> "Avoid toll roads"
> "Avoid ferries"
> "Avoid area": define an area that the
route is to avoid
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Mobility
1. "Navigation"
3. Select the
> "Efficient route": optimized combination
of the fastest and shortest roads
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Terminating destination
guidance
> "Fast route": time-optimized route,
which is a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads
Controls
1. "Navigation"
Driving tips
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Navigation
Starting destination
guidance
Communications Entertainment
Destination guidance
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Destination guidance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
A section of the route up to 32 miles/50 km in
length can be bypassed.
2. Open "Options".
1. "Navigation"
3. "Dynamic guidance"
2. "Route information"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take considerably longer.<
3. "New route for:"
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
different views of the route are available during
destination guidance.
> Map display
> Arrow display
> Display of the streets and towns/cities on
the route.
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.
> Display a list of the streets and towns/cities
on the route.
> Display the traffic bulletins and the driving
distance for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired number.
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed: "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendations
The vehicle calculates the range and recommends several gas stations along the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the
guidance.
symbol to start destination
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
2. "Map"
symbol
The voice instructions are switched on.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The following functions are directly available in
the map display:
Starting/stopping destination guidance
2
Switching voice instructions on/off
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
3
Changing route criteria or selecting route
alternatives
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
4
Special destinations
5
Displaying traffic bulletins
6
Interactive map
7
Settings for the map display
8
Changing scale
Navigation
1
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
Information in the map display:
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
Viewing the map
Map display
1. Select the
symbol.
2. Select a setting:
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
> "View facing north"
> "View in direction of travel"
> "Perspective view"
Mobility
Map display
Communications Entertainment
symbol twice.
> "Arrow display"
3. Press the controller.
Changing scale
1. Select the
symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
3. Select the
Driving tips
Controls
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 20.
Destination guidance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map display facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as
the map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually via iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map display.
Settings for the map display
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
2. Open "Options".
3. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
4. "Settings"
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic bulletins relevant to your planned route are automatically shown. Whether destination guidance is
active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic
info list.
> Optimized view "Night mode"
> Optimized view with spatial display:
"Perspective view in 3D" prominent
areas are shown in the map.
Split screen settings
The map settings for the split screen can be
created separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
4. Press the controller.
5. Select the settings:
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map display.
Opening the traffic bulletins
> "View facing north"
1. "Navigation"
> "View in direction of travel"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
> "Perspective view"
> "3D exit ramps"*
6. To change the scale:
> Move the controller: change the scale.
Traffic bulletins*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
3. Select a traffic bulletin.
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the
symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
When using a smaller map scale, the traffic
obstructions are displayed as gray bars at the
edge of the calculated route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Highlighting traffic bulletins
3. Open "Options".
1. "Navigation"
4. "Traffic Info categories"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
Driving tips
3. To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
Controls
Additional information in the map
display
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
4. "Settings"
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
Symbols in the map display
The appearance of the symbols indicating a
traffic obstruction depends on the scale and the
position of the traffic obstruction relative to the
route.
> Smaller map scale, e.g. 1 mile/2 km: white
sign with the traffic obstruction symbol
> Larger map scale, e.g. 50 miles/100 km:
white sign with an arrow in the relevant
direction
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, taking into consideration traffic obstructions and
road types.
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed.
Reference
5. Select the filter:
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
5. "Traffic Info map"
The map is optimized for displaying the traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.
Destination guidance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Selecting a detour
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select the traffic obstruction that is to be
taken into consideration.
4. "Detour"
Taking into consideration all traffic
obstructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
3. Select "Recommended detour".
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
What to do if …
What to do if …
Controls
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position. Try
again later.
Driving tips
> The destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
Navigation
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
Communications Entertainment
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not yet been fully recorded
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
> The system does not react to entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes up
to 15 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
On/off and tone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
5
> Radio
6
MODE: change the audio and video
sources
Station scan/track search
> CD player
> Change the radio station.
> CD changer*
> Select the track for CD player and CD
changer.
> Video
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Switching on/off
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
> Voice activation system
Buttons near the CD player
In order to switch the entertainment sound output on and off:
Press button 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
If equipped with a single drive, the sound output
is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition is switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
Adjusting volume
Turn button 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
1
Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2
Eject the CD
3
CD/DVD drive
4
FM/AM: change the radio station waveband
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening the tone settings
1. "Radio" or "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Tone"
> To adjust: turn the controller.
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Treble, bass, balance, fader
Individual High-End Audio System* or
LOGIC7*
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
You can choose between stereo and surround.
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
"L7 Surround"
"Surround"
2. To adjust: turn the controller.
3. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Equalizer*
Surround is automatically activated or deactivated, depending on the audio track selected.
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "Equalizer"
2. Select the desired setting.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Volume
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
1. Select the desired tone setting.
Driving tips
> To store: press the controller.
> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC signal tone relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to
the entertainment sound output
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
> "Navigation"*: voice instructions from the
navigation system
Mobility
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control
On/off and tone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Adjustments
1. "Volume settings"
2. Select the desired volume setting.
3. To adjust: turn the controller.
4. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
"Reset"
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
or
Selecting a station
or
Frequency, selecting manually
In "Manual", you can set stations that can be
received in addition to those already being displayed.
1. "FM" or "AM"
2. "Manual"
3. Call up the frequency.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Radio"
To store the station: press the controller.
Storing stations
2. "FM" or "AM"
Via iDrive
3. Call up the desired station.
1. "FM" or "AM"
Mobility
2. Select the desired station.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
Driving tips
Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
Controls
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
Turn the controller.
3. Press the controller again.
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Changing stations
Radio
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
4. Select the desired memory location.
The station is stored.
A digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Via programmable memory keys
1. "FM" or "AM"
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer also to page 20.
2. Open "Options".
1. Select a station.
2.
...
Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS
On the FM waveband, additional information is
broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the display.
3. "HD radio"
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Displaying additional information
Switching RDS on/off*
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
1. "FM"
1. Open "Options".
2. Open "Options".
2. "Station info"
3. "RDS"
Selecting a substation
1. Select a station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally for
improved sound quality.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Stored stations
Storing a station
1. "Presets"
Driving tips
Controls
2. "Store station"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Select the desired memory location.
Navigation
Deleting a station
1. Select a station.
2. Open "Options".
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
3. "Delete entry"
Satellite radio
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Satellite radio*
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding packages enabled.
5. If the channel has not yet been enabled,
then a phone number and the ESN electronic serial number are displayed.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
Enabling the channels
6. Call the phone number to have the channel
enabled.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
The channels can be disabled again via this
phone number.
1. Ensure that reception is reliable. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
Disabling channels
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.
The channels can be disabled by phone. To do
so, have the electronic serial number ESN
ready.
1. "Satellite radio".
2. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.
4. Select the channel.
3. Open "Options".
4. The electronic serial number is displayed.
5. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled channel.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. Select "All Channels" or the desired category.
Notes
If more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is
received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
3. Select the desired channel.
Storing a channel
1. "Satellite radio"
2. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depending on environmental or topographic conditions, it may not be possible to receive a signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
A signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to high-rise buildings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other
strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the signal becomes available again.<
3. "Store Channel".
Communications Entertainment
4. Call up the desired memory location.
Controls
Selecting a channel
Driving tips
Changing the channel using the
buttons below the CD/DVD drive
Navigation
Selecting a channel
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Displaying information about another
channel
Information about a track currently being played
on another channel can be displayed.
1. Highlight the channel on which you wish to
display information.
2. Open "Options".
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
3. "Channel info"
CD player and CD changer
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
CD player and CD changer*
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take the player
approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending
on the directory structure.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
Ejecting a CD
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
Press the button next to the CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
Symbol
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer*
Function
CD/DVD player
CD changer
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Start playback
Audio playback
Via iDrive
Selecting a track
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to
page 159.
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information about the
track*
CDs with compressed audio files*
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
2. Select a track and press the controller.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off if the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Random play sequence
Navigation
> Track file name
Mobility
1. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
> Artist
Reference
Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.
Driving tips
Controls
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
CD player and CD changer
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/DVD"
2. Select a CD with video content.
3.
"Select track"
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Code
Region
1
USA, Canada
2
Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3
Southeast Asia
Video menu
4
Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
To open the Video menu:
5
Northwest Asia, North Africa
6
China
2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
4. Select the desired track.
The CD is started.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
Start playback
The video image is displayed on the Control
Display up to a vehicle speed of approx. 2 mph/
3 km/h.
In some country versions, playback is either not
possible at all or only possible with the parking
brake set.
DVD video
1. "CD/DVD"
2. Select a DVD with video content.
3.
"DVD menu"
4. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
The Video menu is displayed:
Symbol
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
3. "Audio/Language"
Function
Open the DVD menu*
Start playback
Pause
Fast forward
4. Select the desired language.
Reverse
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
Subtitles*
DVD menu
1. Turn the controller during playback.
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. Open "Options".
2.
4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".
"DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
3. "Subtitles"
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Language*
Navigation
Previous chapter/previous track
Communications Entertainment
Next chapter/next track
Driving tips
Controls
Stop
CD player and CD changer
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD magazine
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select chapter"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
"Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2 seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD per compartment with the
labeled side up.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take out
the CD.
Humidity
Inserting the CD magazine
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g. inconsistent datacreation or recording processes, or poor quality
or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
Controls
Driving tips
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
Navigation
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Communications Entertainment
General malfunctions
Mobility
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
CD player and CD changer
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as
needed by wiping it with a commercially available cleaning tissue in straight lines from the
center of the disc outwards.
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Music collection
Controls
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/DVD"
> CDs with compressed audio files: the entire
CD is stored in the vehicle as an album.
After storing, the tracks and directories can
be deleted individually. Files are only stored
in the WMA, MP3, and AAC formats. Tracks
with DRM copy protection can be stored in
the vehicle but cannot be played back.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
1. Insert the CD into the CD player.
3. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
2. "CD/DVD"
3.
Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Store in vehicle"
Continuing the storage process
"Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
The music collection is displayed and the first
track on the CD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in sequence.
Observe the following during the storage process:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD from the CD/DVD player, as this
will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter-
If no information is stored with the tracks, you
can update the entire album information via
BMW Search*, refer to page 186.
Navigation
Driving tips
2. "Storing..."
Communications Entertainment
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored.
The CD is stored in the vehicle as an album.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
Gracenote® technology
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Music tracks from CDs and DVDs can be stored
in the music collection in the vehicle and played
from there.
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD that have already been stored can
be called up.
Reference
Storing music
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Music collection
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Storing from a USB device
4. Select the desired category.
The entire content of the USB device is stored
in the music collection as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted
individually.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music import/export"
5. "Import music (USB)"
All entries are displayed in a list.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Music is stored in the vehicle. The entire content of the USB device is stored as a separate
album and is named automatically.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by
that artist are then displayed.
"Start play"
Music, playing
Restarting the music search
Music search
"New search"
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
Current playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. "Current playback"
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "Top 50"
Albums
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Renaming an album
Albums
The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown it can be changed later if
needed.
Audio CD
>
Compressed audio files
Select the desired album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
Driving tips
>
Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first
track is played automatically, if possible.
To select tracks, change directories if needed.
To go up one level in the directory, move the
controller to the left.
Random play sequence
Navigation
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. Highlight the album.
1. Open "Options".
3. "Delete album"
2. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
Deleting a track and directory
1. Highlight the directory or track.
Communications Entertainment
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
Controls
Managing music
Top 50
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
2. Open "Options".
If audio CDs are stored without information, the
information can be updated for each individual
audio CD via BMW Search, if desired.
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Album information*
Mobility
3. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Music collection
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Updating album information via BMW
Search*
6. "Music import/export"
1. Highlight the desired album.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Update album data online"
7. "Backup music on USB device"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
Storing the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing music from the USB
medium, the existing music collection in
the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
2. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
Deleting the music collection
3. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
4. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
5. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
AUX-IN port
3. "Volume"
Controls
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Navigation
4. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
Communications Entertainment
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
"AUX (front)"
Mobility
Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If the volume varies greatly
from the other audio sources, it makes sense to
adjust the volume to the same level.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2.
"AUX (front)"
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
2.
Driving tips
Lift up the center armrest.
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio
interface*
Connectable devices
iPod/iPhone, mobile phone or USB devices
(MP3 player, USB flash drive). They can be
operated via iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Due to the large number of different audio
devices/mobile phones available on the market,
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile
phones at your BMW center.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
The menu structure of the iPod/iPhone is supported by the USB-audio interface/mobile
phone audio interface.
USB storage device
To connect the device, use a flexible
adapter cable to protect the USB interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the USB device to
port 1.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000
tracks.
1
AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2
USB-audio interface
If a fifth USB device is connected, the information stored in the vehicle on the tracks of the
first USB device is deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
iPod/iPhone
To connect the iPod/iPhone, use the BMW
cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone. For
more information, contact your BMW center or
go to the Internet: www.bmw.com
Starting audio playback
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the iPod/iPhone to
ports 1 and 2.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
2. "External devices"
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
3.
Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" is available depending on the number of entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
Track search
You can call up the tracks using the playlists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up tracks using the file directory.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
Notes
3.
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Artist".
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Driving tips
"New search"
Navigation
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
Restarting a track search
Communications Entertainment
Information about the track
6. "Start play"
Mobility
If, for example, an iPhone is connected to the
USB interface at the same time that an audio
device is connected to the AUX-IN port, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.
The tracks found are listed. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, call
up that artist only. All of the tracks by that
artist are then displayed.
Controls
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
> The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Notes on connecting
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
vided that this is supported by the audio
device. Therefore, do not connect the USB
audio device to the power socket in the
vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 169 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Telephone*
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a Full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and
which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Operating options
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent reproduction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 179
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, otherwise malfunctions may result.
Start-up
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the Full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
5. "Add new phone"
> Depending on the mobile phone, some
default settings may be necessary for the
mobile phone: e.g. using the following
menu items:
Controls
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
> For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16digit number as a Bluetooth passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers the best protection against unauthorized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required after pairing is successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.
Preparation via the mobile phone
6. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also appears on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
3. "Telephone"
Driving tips
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
Navigation
> Reconnection
Communications Entertainment
> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
page 174, and on the mobile phone.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
4. "Bluetooth"
Telephone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends
on your mobile phone and can take several minutes; please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. "Telephone"
3. "Bluetooth"
4. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat
the pairing procedure.
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected with the mobile phone. If necessary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are deleted as well.
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth
link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
1. "Telephone"
> Ending a call
2. "Bluetooth"
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition lock, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for several minutes.
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Bluetooth"
Controls
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Receiving calls
Operation via iDrive
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
Accepting a call
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> Dialing phone numbers
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
Navigation
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free system
Communications Entertainment
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or pointing the
open front air vents downward
or
"Accept"
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Adjusting volume
Mobility
If the person you are talking to is having difficulties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The Full preparation package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
Driving tips
Voice quality
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Telephone
or:
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Toggling between calls, telephone
conference
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
These functions are available if supported by
your mobile phone. Toggling may not be supported by the service provider or may need to
be enabled separately.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
or
This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Dialing phone numbers
3. "Hold"
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4.
Select this symbol to establish the connection.
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this handset.
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Establishing a conference call
Symbol
Storage location*
No symbol
In the vehicle.
Mobile phone
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
Phone book
For contacts with several phone numbers:
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
2. Select the desired phone number.
1. "Telephone"
Editing a contact
2. "Phone book"
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
The connection is established.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
Navigation
2. "Conference call"
Communications Entertainment
1. Establish two calls.
Driving tips
Controls
Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.
The ten phone numbers dialed last are stored.
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Redialing
Mobility
The contact can be edited.
Telephone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Dialing the number via iDrive
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
Select an entry.
2. "Redial"
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
3. Select the desired entry.
4. The connection is established.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
4. Complete the entries if necessary.
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
Received calls
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
The 20 calls that were last received are displayed.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands-free system. Refer to
the display on your mobile phone and/or your
mobile phone's operating instructions.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free system, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link.
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the
or
button on the steering wheel
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
In dialogs where text, e.g. a name, rather than a
command is spoken, canceling is only possible
using the button on the steering wheel.
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
During your entries, you will be guided in many
cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 175.
Saying commands
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
{Voice commands}.
2. Say the command.
{Dial number} or {n. t. a.}
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Voice control response
{Dial number}
{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890}
Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}
{Dialing}
{{Dialing number}}
Communications Entertainment
1. Briefly press the
button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Navigation
Using alternative commands
Activating the system
You say
Driving tips
Operation by voice
commands*
Controls
{Cancel}.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Telephone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dialing}.
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
{Delete}
Creating and editing a voice phone
book*
To store an entry:
An entry always consists of a name and a phone
number.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
Saying the name for the voice phone
book should not take longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. To save the phone number:
{Save}.
To delete an entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry opens.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
To delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting the phone book
opens.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
A separate voice phone book is needed for
operation using voice commands.
The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers
stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up
or saved there using voice commands. Up to 50
entries can be set up. An entry always consists
of a name and a phone number.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
To read and dial entries:
You can have all entries in your voice phone
book read aloud in the order in which they were
entered and select a specific entry to establish a
connection:
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading the phone book
opens.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
1. {Choose name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
To redial the phone number dialed last:
{Redial}
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the following:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Inserting/removing the snapin adapter
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical contact points and press it downward until it
engages.
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steering is unlocked.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Redialing
Communications Entertainment
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Driving tips
Controls
2. Say the name when prompted.
Mobility
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
Reference
Selecting an entry
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Telephone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
To conserve battery power, you should
avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
1. "Contacts"
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
2. "New contact"
3. Fill in the entry fields.
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
4. Open "Options".
Navigation
5. "Store as home address"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
If the home address is deleted, only the content
of the home address entry is deleted and not
the entry itself.
My contacts
5. Enter the text.
Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehicle can be
entered. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.<
6. "Store contact in vehicle"
Controls
A contact that has already been created can be
stored as a home address. It is placed at the top
of the "My contacts".
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone*.
Displaying contacts
Communications Entertainment
New contact
Specifying a contact as the home
address
Mobility
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
of the mobile phone* are also displayed. The
addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.
Driving tips
Contacts
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
"My contacts"
Contacts
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:
Symbol
Storage location*
No symbol
In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a
destination.
Mobile phone
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the contact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Displaying the detailed view
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
Selecting a contact as the navigation
destination
4. Change the entries.
1. "My contacts"
5. Move the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired contact.
6. "Yes"
3. Select the desired address.
If a contact from the mobile phone or BMW
Search is edited, the changes are not stored on
the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored
in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.
Contacts from the mobile phone may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be matched to the
navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
2. Open "Options".
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, for example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas
stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses.
Using an address for destination
guidance
"Start guidance" or "Insert as dest. in the
trip"
Driving tips
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance.
Controls
BMW Assist
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
Saving an address
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store contact in vehicle"
Answering messages
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge.
You are connected to an employee of the BMW
Concierge to obtain the required information.
You can then have the phone number and
address sent to you and, for example, use it for
destination guidance in the navigation system.
Many hotels can be booked directly through the
BMW Assist Concierge service. When an information message is received, a list of the
received messages is displayed automatically.
The message answering function is only available for MyInfo messages if answers are predefined in the messages.
1. Select the message that you wish to
respond to.
2. Open "Options".
3. Open "Answer".
4. Select the desired answer.
Deleting messages
Communications Entertainment
"Call number in message"
Navigation
Dialing a phone number
1. Select the message to be deleted.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages".
Roadside Assistance
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance*
should you require help in the event of a breakdown.
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
The BMW Concierge messages and MyInfo
messages from the BMW Assist portal are
listed here.
Mobility
2. Open "Options".
Messages
BMW Assist
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleService
wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.
1. "BMW Assist"
Starting TeleService Help
2. "TeleService Diagnosis"
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Leave the ignition switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assistance.
Activating BMW Assist
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone* is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "TeleService Diagnosis"
3. "Start service"
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
Requirements
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically if the vehicle is
equipped with BMW TeleService.
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Internet*
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
Using BMW Search
The start page is displayed. The Internet pages
may not be displayed in the same way as on a
PC screen. Flash and Java applications cannot
be displayed.
Driving tips
Controls
2. "Internet"
Using the Internet
> Press the controller to display an element.
Menu bar
Opening the start page
A menu bar is displayed for use. To activate the
menu bar, move the controller to the left until
the cursor is located in the menu bar.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
Symbol
Function
Activate the mouse cursor
Opening the start page
Refresh
Cancel
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Update"
Back
Communications Entertainment
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
Navigation
To select and display content:
Enter a URL
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Canceling
BMW Assist
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Bookmarks/favorites
Zoom
Leave the browser
Bookmarks/favorites
Adding a bookmark
The page currently being displayed is stored as
a bookmark.
1. Select the
symbol.
2. "Add to bookmarks"
Navigating with the mouse pointer
1. Select the
symbol.
2. Use the mouse pointer to navigate on the
page.
> To move the mouse pointer: move the
controller in the required direction
> To select an element: press the controller
> To scroll: turn the controller
Selecting a bookmark
Status display
1. Select the
A symbol at the top left of the screen shows the
following statuses.
2. Select the desired bookmark.
symbol.
Symbol
Function
1. Select the
No connection possible
2. Open "Options".
Data transfer
3. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all bookmarks"
Deleting a bookmark
symbol.
Secure connection
Entering an Internet address
1.
"Enter URL"
2. Individually select the letters and characters
of the desired address.
3. Select "OK".
Defining a bookmark as the start page
1. Select the
symbol.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Set as home URL"
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Settings
Assist or the mobile phone preparation package, a voice connection is established.
Suppressing cookies
1. Open "Options".
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
2. "Suppress cookies"
2. "Block HTTPS pop-ups"
Service Request*
Activating TeleService*
You can send a request to your BMW center to
arrange a service appointment. The TeleService data is transmitted during a Service
Request. Your BMW center will contact you.
If the services are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Activate TeleService"
Customer Relations
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.
Automatic Service Request*
2. "Customer Relations"
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. The center
will contact you and a service appointment can
be arranged.
The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If the vehicle is equipped with BMW
You can check when the BMW center was notified.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
1. Open "Options".
Communications Entertainment
Suppressing safety warnings
Mobility
2. "Suppress pop-ups"
Reference
1. Open "Options".
Driving tips
Controls
Suppressing pop-ups
BMW Assist
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
BMW center*
Address and contact data of the BMW center.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Your BMW center"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 191 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
roadside assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Refueling
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Coupe
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo bay.
Opening
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Convertible
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler door manually:
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo bay trim panel
by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is
not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Approx. 16.6 US gal/63 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 3.3 US gal/12.5 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Controls
Fuel tank capacity
Driving tips
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Fuel specifications
Navigation
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this
would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<
Communications Entertainment
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Mobility
Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Wheels and tires
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive on
a flat tire. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 84, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 85.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The table below provides all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following page in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following page in the columns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Coupe: tire inflation pressures
Tire size
Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
Controls
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
33/230
36/250
33/230
Front: 245/40 ZR 18
Rear: 265/40 ZR 18
36/250
38/260
33/230
-
-
35/240
Front: 245/35 ZR 19
33/230
Rear: 265/35 ZR 19
-
44/300
33/230
-
39/270
-
-
35/240
-
44/300
-
33/230
-
41/280
-
35/240
-
35/240
-
44/300
Driving tips
235/40 R 18 M+S
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 231.
Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
235/40 R 18 M+S
36/250
42/290
36/250
42/290
41/280
51/350
Front: 245/40 ZR 18
33/230
-
35/240
-
41/280
-
Rear: 265/40 ZR 18
-
35/240
-
35/240
-
46/320
Front: 245/35 ZR 19
36/250
-
35/240
-
42/290
-
Rear: 265/35 ZR 19
-
38/260
-
35/240
-
46/320
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 231.
Communications Entertainment
Tire size
Navigation
Convertible: tire inflation pressures
Wheels and tires
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
e.g.
245/35 ZR 19
235/40 R 18 100 V
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
Speed code letter
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tread wear
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
e.g.
DOT xxxx xxx 3208
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 3208 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 32 of 2008.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
Controls
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazard and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
Navigation
M+S
Wheel/tire damage
Communications Entertainment
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Mobility
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Reference
Temperature
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Wheels and tires
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Recommended tire brands
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. When selecting tires, also take their load
capacity into account. If non-approved wheels
and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their
suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their
driving safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect
a puncture, refer to page 85. Your BMW center
will be glad to advise you.
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads
or at temperatures below +457/+76.
Although all-season M+S tires provide better
winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of coldweather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. With standard-equipment tires
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
and other mixed tire sizes, swapping wheels
between the axles is not permissible.
Snow chains*
Driving tips
Controls
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Ensure that the snow chains are sufficiently
tensioned at all times. If necessary, retension as
specified by the snow chain manufacturer.
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.<
Under the hood
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/
25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Hood
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down, otherwise injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 206
3
Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 222
2
Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system,
refer to page 66
4
Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Engine oil
Display in the instrument cluster
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
1
Oil level
2
Maximum mark
3
Minimum mark
4
Computer button
Mobility
The oil level can be displayed when the engine
is warm. Continuous short distance travel or a
very sporty driving style may make measurement impossible.
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Communications Entertainment
1
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Important parts of the engine compartment
Under the hood
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Press button 4 in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the oil level display appears in the
instrument cluster.
M dual clutch transmission*: the oil level
appears in the top display.<
The oil level must be between the two markings.
A new measurement is taken automatically
each time the engine is started.
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
4
Oil level is too high.
Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
5
A value cannot be read at this time. The
engine is not yet warm.
Quick measurement
Possible displays
In addition to the automatic measurement, you
can also determine the current oil level manually, e.g. after adding engine oil, but such measurements are less accurate.
1. Park the vehicle with a warm engine, i.e.
after an uninterrupted drive of at least
6 miles/10 km, on a horizontal surface.
2. Let the engine idle.
3. Press the computer button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the oil level display appears in the instrument cluster.
4. Press the computer button for at least
2 seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
appears during measurement.
5. After approx. 1 minute, the current oil level
is displayed.
Display via iDrive
1
Oil level OK.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
2
Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
1. "Vehicle Info"
3
2. "Vehicle status"
Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but
no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 205. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oillevel monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add no more than 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, otherwise too much engine oil can lead to engine
damage. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters,
otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to
display the new value reliably.<
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but
no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 205. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oillevel monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Specified engine oils
Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Do not add engine oil. Before resuming your
trip, note the newly calculated distance
remaining to the next oil service, refer to
page 72. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Controls
Driving tips
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a
standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
Navigation
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
Communications Entertainment
> "Engine oil level OK"
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.<
Your BMW center will be glad to answer
any questions regarding BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Possible messages
Adding engine oil
Reference
3. "Engine oil level"
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Under the hood
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Viscosity ratings
Checking coolant level
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
Approved oils belong to the 10W-60 SAE
class.<
Alternative oil types
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of other
synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use
oils with the following specifications:
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
> Viscosity:
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification:
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low ambient temperatures
The oils used at BMW factories for your vehicle
type are suitable for virtually any ambient temperature. However, if the vehicle is operated at
temperatures below –47/–206 for extended
periods, your BMW center will be glad to recommend an optimal oil.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. If the loss of coolant is substantial, have the
cause eliminated as soon as possible.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.<
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 75; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<
Controls
Your vehicle continuously stores servicerequirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Driving tips
Service data in the remote control
Navigation
BMW Maintenance System
Communications Entertainment
Maintenance
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
> Brake fluid
Maintenance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding
services.
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the
left, on the bottom of the instrument panel
underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have
worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the
warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material tested, laboratory checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in damage.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 49
> Maximum permissible tire width
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Deactivate the rain sensor* to prevent unintentional wiping.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g.
spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a
possibility that they could be damaged.
M dual clutch transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control, even with convenient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Engage transmission position N.
Exterior care
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets / high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain sufficient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instructions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray against the sensors and cam209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 229
Driving tips
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
Navigation
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Communications Entertainment
Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.
Do not use high-pressure car washes,
otherwise water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Mobility
Care products
Reference
Care
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Care
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
eras, e.g. Park Distance Control, for an
extended period and maintain a distance of at
least 12 in/30 cm.<
essary, remove items from the cargo bay
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove very aggressive substances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree
resin or bird droppings, to prevent damage to
the paintwork.<
Headlamps
Repairing paintwork damage
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
Remove contamination, such as insects, by
soaking with shampoo or insect remover and
then rinsing with plenty of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and contamination on the window can lead to
streaking when operating the windshield wipers, leading to premature wear of the wiper
blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunction.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash.
When you open a wet hardtop, water
drops may run into the cargo bay. If nec-
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals, otherwise noise and
damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames, with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Interior care
Upholstery / cloth trim
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical reasons and can be removed by vacuuming
repeatedly.
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
Clean with water and, if necessary, with solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Fine wood parts
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Safety belts
Leather / leather trim
Controls
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat
rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this
may damage the mats.
Driving tips
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance
Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they
remain fully functional.<
You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or
clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled.
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Do not clean with cleaning agents as
these may destroy the fabric.<
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Interior sensors / cameras
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Displays
To clean interior sensors and cameras, use a
lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays, otherwise damage
may occur.<
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
Outside sensors / cameras
Carpets / cargo bay
Communications Entertainment
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets over 1407/606, otherwise damage may occur.<
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the
leather's protective layer.
Mobility
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acidfree rim cleaner.
In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is
cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil
more easily.
Reference
Light-alloy wheels
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Care
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than six weeks, your BMW center or a
workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Convertible
Wiper blades
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook
on the bottom, see arrow.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch, otherwise you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the consumer in question, otherwise short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
The onboard tool kit is stored in a pouch under
the cargo bay floor panel.
Reference
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment
on the right-hand side of the cargo bay.
Remove the cover.
Navigation
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
the windshield, see arrow.
Communications Entertainment
3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
Driving tips
Controls
Coupe
Replacing components
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Control elements, display components, part of
the exterior lighting and other interior equipment in your vehicle are equipped with covered
light-emitting diodes as light sources. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 lightemitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reattach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover, otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
Xenon lamps
1. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the
bulbs.
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail.
2. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and
take it out.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Accessing the bulbs
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the headlamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
3. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
4. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
5. Reattach the cover.
Corner-illuminating lamp*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the
bulbs.
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Tail lamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other bulbs:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in
the fender.
Driving tips
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
Controls
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Turn signal
2
Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
3
Backup lamp
4
Brake lamp, consisting of two individual
bulbs
5
Brake force display
6
Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
If the bulbs 2 and 6 malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
Fender-mounted lamps
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left, arrow 2, and
take it out.
1. Left-hand side: use a screwdriver to pry off
the cover in the cargo bay and remove the
cover.
4. Turn the bulb socket in the bulb holder to
the right for removal and replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right using a coin.
Coupe
Right-hand side: remove the cover from the
right-hand side panel of the cargo bay.
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and pull out.
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
1
Mobility
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
Reference
PY24W Silver Vision bulb, 24 watts
Navigation
Turn signals, front
Replacing components
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Lamps in the luggage compartment lid
Coupe
3. Turn signal indicator: apply gentle pressure
to the bulb while turning it to the left for
removal and replacement.
1. Using a screw driver, remove the fastening
plugs on the edge and in the handle
recesses of the luggage compartment lid
trim. To do so, first loosen the top part of the
plug, see arrow, and then completely
remove the plug by pulling on its bottom
part. Remove the trim.
Backup lamps and brake lamps: take out
the bulbs and change them.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Convertible
1. Turn the screws on the corresponding side,
see arrow, by 90° and remove the cover.
2. While applying light pressure, turn the bulb
holder of the turn signal bulb to the left.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
2. Unlock the bulb holder by turning it to the
left, see arrow, and take it out.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
5. Attach the luggage compartment lid trim by
inserting the bottom part of the fastening
plug and then fixing the plug with its top
part.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
luggage compartment lid using a screwdriver and remove the trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
6. Reattach the trim of the luggage compartment lid and the holder for the warning triangle.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
parking/tail lamp and side turn signal
indicators
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
The M Mobility System is located in the cargo
bay under the floor board.
If possible, leave any foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire in place.
Instructions on how to use the M Mobility
System can also be found on the device
itself.<
Before using the M Mobility System, follow the instructions on the sealant bottle.<
Remove the label with the speed restriction
from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
Please note the expiry date on the sealant
bottle.<
Repairing a flat tire with the
M Mobility System
Mobility
To repair a flat tire, your BMW M3 includes an
M Mobility System. With this system you can
apply a sealant to the inside of the tire to seal
the damaged section, restore the tire inflation
pressure and continue on your trip.
Navigation
Driving tips
Preparations
Communications Entertainment
1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder,
refer to page 222. Unscrew the holder using
the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit.
Controls
traffic as possible and on a firm surface. Switch
on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and engage first gear
or reverse. Have all occupants leave the vehicle
and move beyond the danger zone, e.g. behind
the guard rails.
If necessary, erect a warning triangle* or warning flasher* at a suitable distance. Adhere to
country-specific regulations.<
Safety measures in the event of a flat tire:
Park the vehicle as far away from moving
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Convertible
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Replacing components
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Components of the M Mobility System
Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape under
high pressure.<
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Screw connection hose 9 onto the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw 8 on the pressure gauge
is closed.
1
Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction
2
Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
3
Connector and cable for the cigarette
lighter socket/power socket
4
Holder for the sealant bottle
5
Compressor
6
On/off switch
7
Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure
8
Screw on pressure gauge to reduce tire
inflation pressure
9
Hose to connect compressor and sealant
bottle or compressor and wheel
The connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Using the M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill the sealant, refer to page 218.
> Distribute the sealant, refer to page 218.
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective wheel and screw filling hose 2 of
the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of
the compressor so that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket/power socket in the interior of the
vehicle, refer to page 107.
8. With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The
inflation pressure of the tire after filling is
unimportant.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle
connector and from the tire valve.
Return the M Mobility System to its storage
location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km to
evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.
> Produce the tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 219.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows:
Jack mounting points
> To increase the inflation pressure:
Switch on the compressor, position I. To
check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise the
device will overheat and may be damaged.<
> To reduce the inflation pressure: turn
screw 8 on the pressure gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not maintained,
drive the vehicle a second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to
4.
Use of the M Mobility System may be ineffectual for tire damage larger than approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 221, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the M Mobility
System.<
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. If it is not, do not continue
driving.<
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 222.
Continuing your trip
Disposal
Do not exceed the maximum allowable
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h to avoid the risk
of an accident.<
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Driving tips
3. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket/power socket in the interior of the
vehicle.
Changing wheels
Navigation
2. Connect connection hose 9 of the compressor directly to the tire valve.
Communications Entertainment
1. After driving approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at a
suitable location.
Mobility
Producing the tire inflation pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 84 for more information.
Have the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the
M Mobility System replaced as soon as possible.<
Reference
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/
60 km/h. If possible, do not fall below a
speed of 12 mph/20 km/h.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Replacing components
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 74.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 149.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 126.
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set
in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 46.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 103.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, otherwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
wireless network.
> The Emergency Request system is operable.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if it can be determined.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to
assist you around the clock in the event of a
breakdown, including on weekends and public
holidays.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can
establish contact with BMW Roadside Assistance for breakdown assistance directly via
iDrive, refer to page 185.
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 186.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
Navigation
> Equipment version with Full preparation
package mobile phone. This equipment
makes it possible to send an Emergency
Request even if no mobile phone is paired
with the vehicle.
Communications Entertainment
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
Mobility
Emergency Request*
Reference
Giving and receiving assistance
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Giving and receiving assistance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.
Warning triangle*
Coupe
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it
out.
Convertible
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take
it out.
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment
under the front passenger's seat.
Jump starting
To open: press the button and fold the cover
down.
To close: fold the cover back up and press it into
the catch.
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 203. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Communications Entertainment
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
Driving tips
Controls
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
Mobility
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.
Reference
Preparation
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Giving and receiving assistance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath the cover on the right-hand side of the
cargo bay, refer to page 213.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard tool kit
underneath the cargo bay floor, refer to
page 213.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Ensure that the parking lock P is not
engaged as the rear wheels will otherwise
be blocked.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 57, note that the parking lock P is
engaged automatically after approx. 30 minutes, blocking the rear wheels.
If an electrical malfunction occurs or if towing
takes longer than approx. 20 minutes, manually
release the parking lock, refer to page 60.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph/50 km/h and a maximum distance of 30 miles/50 km, otherwise the
transmission can be damaged.<
Front
BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on
a tow truck with a flat bed.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise damage may result.<
Rear
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 55, otherwise the low-beam
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
cles with a catalytic converter should only be
tow-started when the engine is cold.
Manual transmission
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck
Manual transmission:
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Communications Entertainment
Vehicles with an M dual clutch transmission
cannot be tow-started. Jump-starting, refer to
page 222.
Controls
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Driving tips
With a tow rope
Navigation
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Mobility
M dual clutch transmission:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
jump-start the engine, refer to page 222. Vehi225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Tow-starting
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technical data
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Technical data
Engine data
M3
Displacement
cu in/cmμ
244/3,999
hp
414
Number of cylinders
Maximum power output
at engine speed
Maximum torque
at engine speed
8
rpm
8,300
lb ft/Nm
295/400
rpm
3,900
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Dimensions
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Coupe
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 38 ft 5 in/11.7 m.
Technical data
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 38 ft 5 in/11.7 m.
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Weights
Coupe
M3
882/400
lbs/kg
2,249/1,020
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,469/1,120
Approved roof load capacity
lbs/kg
165/75
cu ft/liters
15.2/430
Approved gross weight
lbs/kg
5,027/2,280
Load
lbs/kg
882/400
Approved front axle load
lbs/kg
2,337/1,060
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,800/1,270
cu ft/liters
7.4-12.4/210-350
Convertible
M3
Cargo bay capacity
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank
US gal/liters
approx. 16.6/63
including reserve of
US gal/liters
approx. 3.3/12.5
US qt/liters
approx. 4.8/4.5
Window washer system
For more details: page 66
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
including headlamp washers
Fuel grade: page 195
Controls
lbs/kg
Approved front axle load
Driving tips
Load
Cargo bay capacity
4,586/2,080
Navigation
lbs/kg
Communications Entertainment
Approved gross weight
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Short commands for the voice activation system
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Short commands for the voice activation
system*
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
Function
Command
Switching on the radio
{Radio on}
Opening the music collection
{Music collection}
Tone control
{Tone}
Opening the settings
{Settings}
Opening the computer
{Onboard info}
Opening the contacts*
{Contacts}
Displaying the phone book*
{Phonebook}
Opening BMW Assist*
{B M W Assist}
Opening the home address*
{Home address}
Opening destination entry*
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance*
{Guidance}
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function
Command
Playing back a CD
{C D on}
Selecting a CD
{Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track
{C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track
{C D track ...} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu
{C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD
{C D and D V D}
CD and DVD changer*
{C D and D V D}
CD and DVD menu
{C D and D V D}
Playing back a DVD
{D V D on}
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Function
Command
Selecting a DVD
{D V D ...}
Switching on the DVD changer
{D V D on}
Entertainment details on the split screen
{Entertainment details}
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
{Music collection}
Playing back the music collection
{Music collection on}
Searching for music; opening the menu
{Music search}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks
{Top fifty}
Driving tips
Opening the music collection
Function
Command
Opening external devices
{External devices}
Navigation
External devices
Function
Command
Opening the tone control
{Tone}
Communications Entertainment
Tone control
Radio
FM
Function
Command
Calling up the radio
{Radio}
Switching on the radio
{Radio on}
Calling up FM
{F M}
Playing FM
{F M on}
Opening manual search
{Manual search}
Calling up a frequency
{Frequency ... megahertz} e.g. 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting the frequency range
{Select frequency}
Selecting a radio station
{Station ...} e.g. W-PLJ
Calling up a station
{Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
Command
{Current playback}
Reference
Function
Calling up the current playback
Controls
Music collection
Short commands for the voice activation system
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
AM
Function
Command
Calling up AM
{A M}
Playing AM
{A M on}
Opening manual search
{Manual search}
Calling up a frequency
{Frequency ... Kilohertz} e.g. frequency
753 kilohertz or 753 kilohertz
Weather Band
Function
Command
Calling up the Weather Band
{Weather band}
Switching on the Weather Band
{Weather band on}
Selecting a Weather Band station
{Select a weather channel}
Satellite radio
Function
Command
Calling up the satellite radio
{Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio
{Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel
{Satellite radio channel ...} e.g. channel 2
Stored stations
Function
Command
Opening the stored stations
{Presets}
Choosing a stored station
{Select preset}
Selecting a stored station
{Preset ...} e.g. stored station 2
Telephone
Function
Command
Opening the Telephone menu
{Telephone}
Displaying the phone book
{Phonebook}
Redialing
{Redial}
Displaying accepted calls
{Received calls}
Dialing a phone number
{Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages
{Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth
{Bluetooth devices}
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Navigation
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
{Guidance}
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance
{Stop guidance}
{Home address}
{Route preference}
Opening the route
{Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions
{Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction
{Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions
{Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book
{Address book}
Displaying the last destinations
{Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins
{Traffic Info}
Special destinations
{Points of interest}
Navigation
Opening the home address
Opening the route criteria
Driving tips
{Navigation}
Opening destination entry
Map
Function
Command
Displaying the map
{Map}
Map facing north
{Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel
{Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map
{Perspective map}
Automatic scaling of the map*
{Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale
{Map scale}
Scale...feet*
{Map scale ... feet} e.g. map scale of 100 feet
Scale...meters*
{Map scale ... meters} e.g. map scale of
100 meters
Scale...kilometers*
{Map scale ... kilometers} e.g. map scale of
5 kilometers
Scale...miles*
{Map scale ... miles} e.g. map scale of 5 miles
Scale...yards*
{Map scale ... yards} e.g. map scale of
100 yards
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Navigation menu
Mobility
Command
Reference
Function
Controls
General information
Short commands for the voice activation system
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Split screen settings
Function
Command
Split screen
{Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen
{Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen
{Split screen content}
Split screen current position
{Split screen current position}
Split screen map facing north
{Split screen map facing north}
Split screen direction of travel
{Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen perspective
{Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen
{Split screen automatic scaling}
Split screen scale...feet*
{Split screen scale ... feet} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters*
{Split screen scale ... meters} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers*
{Split screen scale ... kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles*
{Split screen scale ... miles} e.g. split screen
scale of 5 miles
Split screen scale...yards*
{Split screen scale ... yards} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 yards
Split screen, computer
{Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer
{Splitscreen trip computer}
Contacts
Function
Command
Opening the contacts
{Contacts}
My contacts
{My contacts}
New contact
{New contact}
BMW Assist
Function
Command
Opening BMW Assist
{B M W Assist}
Opening BMW Search*
{B M W Search}
Opening the Internet*
{Internet}
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Function
Command
Opening the computer
{Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer
{Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information
{Vehicle information}
Opening the vehicle status
{Vehicle status}
Controls
Vehicle information
Settings
Opening the main menu
{Main menu}
Opening the settings
{Settings}
Opening the options
{Options}
Central display settings
{Central display}
Opening the time and date settings
{Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings
{Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings
{Limit}
Opening the light menu
{Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings
{Door locks}
Navigation
Command
Communications Entertainment
Function
Driving tips
Vehicle
Equipment
Command
{Climate}
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Function
Opening the air conditioning settings
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 63
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 221
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 99
Adaptive brake light
– brake force display 88
Adaptive Head Light 93
Additives
– coolant 206
Address, entering 127, 133
Address for navigation
– entering 127, 133
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 97
Adjusting the thigh support 43
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 146
Airbags 88
– indicator/warning lamp 90
– sitting safely 42
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air distribution
– automatic 97
Air flow rate 98
Airing, refer to Ventilation 99
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 196
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Air supply
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air vents 96
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 195
Alarm system 32
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
– interior motion sensor 33
– switching off an alarm 33
– tilt alarm sensor 33
Album information for
music 163
Albums of music
collection 163
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 200
AM, waveband 149
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Antenna for mobile phone 172
Antifreeze
– coolant 206
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Anti-theft system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 231
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 231
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 105
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 70
Ashtray
– front 106
– rear 107
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
AUC Automatic recirculatedair control 98
Audio 146
– controls 146
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Audio device, external 105
Automatic
– air distribution 97
– air flow rate 97
– cruise control 66
– headlamp control 92
Automatic car washes 209
Automatic climate control 96
– automatic air distribution 97
Automatic curb monitor 49
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 98
Automatic Service
Request 189
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– towing 223
– tow-starting 223
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 97
AUX-IN port 165
Average fuel consumption 70
– setting the units 71
Avoid highways in
navigation 137
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 231
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 175
– ending 176
– rejecting 176
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 176
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Capacities 231
Capacity of the cargo bay 231
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 219
Car care, refer to Care 209
Navigation
C
Communications Entertainment
Break-in period 116
Brightness of the Control
Display 79
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 213
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 55
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
Mobility
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 43
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 45
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 215
Backup lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 215
Bag holder 109
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 222
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 224
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 181
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 105
Bass, tone setting 146
Battery 219
– charging 219
– disposal 35, 219
– jump starting 222
– remote control 26
– temporary power failure 220
Battery for mobile phone 181
Battery renewal
– remote control 35
– remote control for vehicle 35
Being towed 224
Belt hand-over 48
Belts, refer to Safety belts 47
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 47
Beverage holders, refer to
Cup holders 106
Blinds, refer to Roller sun
blinds 104
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 98
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 174
Bluetooth, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
BMW
– car shampoo 211
BMW Assist, activating 186
BMW Assist 185
BMW center 190
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 207
BMW Search 186
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Brake assist 82
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 72
Brake force display 88
– bulb change 216
Brake lamps
– replacing bulb 215
Brake lights
– brake force display 88
Brake pads 116
– breaking in 116
Brake rotors 117
– brakes 116
– breaking in 116
Brakes
– ABS 82
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– brake force display 88
– breaking in 116
– parking brake 57
– service requirements 72
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 117
Brake system 116
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– breaking in 116
– disc brakes 117
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 221
Breaking in the clutch 116
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 116
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
B
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Care 209
– automatic car washes 209
– care products 209
– carpets 211
– CD/DVD drives 212
– chrome parts 210
– displays 211
– exterior 209
– fine wood parts 211
– headlamps 210
– high-pressure washer 209
– interior 211
– leather 211
– light-alloy wheels 211
– paintwork 210
– plastic parts 211
– retractable hardtop 210
– rubber seals 210
– safety belts 211
– sensors and cameras 211
– upholstery and cloth
trim 211
– washing the car
manually 210
– windows 210
– wiper blades 210
Cargo, securing 119
Cargo bay
– capacity 231
– convenient access 34
– folding up the floor
panel 110
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 94
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 119
– stowing cargo 119
– vehicle 118
Car jack
– jacking points 219
Car key, refer to Remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 172
Car radio, refer to Radio 149
Car shampoo 211
Car wash
– before entering 57
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 116
CBS Condition Based
Service 207
CD, audio playback 154
CD changer 154
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 156
– installation location 158
– random play sequence 155
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
CD player 154
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 156
– random play sequence 155
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Center armrest 105
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 217
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Central locking system 27
– convenient access 34
– hotel function 31
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 213
Changing gears 60
Changing the language on the
Control Display 79
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 71
Changing wheels 219
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 203
Check Control 76
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 54
Child-restraint systems 53
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 53
Chrome parts 211
Chrome polish 211
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 107
Cleaning headlamps 65
– washer fluid 66
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 209
Clock 68
– 12h/24h mode 75
– setting the time and date 75
– setting time 74
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 106
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Combined instrument, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 34
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Compass 103
Computer 69
– displays on Control
Display 70
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
Concierge service 185
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 118
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Data, technical 228
– dimensions 229
– engine 228
– weights 231
Data transfer 190
Date
– date format 76
– setting 75
Daytime running lamps 93
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 89
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
Destination, entering by town/
city name 127
Destination address
– entering 127, 133
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 133
– entering via map 132
– entry 127
– home address 130
– manual entry 127
Destination guidance 137
– bypassing a route
section 138
– changing specified
route 137
– continuing 137
– starting 137
– voice instructions 138
– volume of voice
instructions 139
Digital clock 68
Digital compass 103
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 150
Dimensions 229
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 138
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 129
Mobility
Convertible
– bag holder 109
– convenient loading 28
– enlarging cargo bay 108
– folding down rear
backrest 109
– retractable hardtop 38
– rollover protection
system 90
– securing cargo 119
Coolant 206
– checking level 206
Coolant temperature 69
Cooling, maximum 97
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 206
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 206
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head
Light 93
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 93
Correct tires 200
Country codes DVD 156
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 94
Criteria for route 137
Cross-hairs in navigation 132
Cruise control 66
Cruising range 70
Cup holders 106
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 231
Current playback of music
collection 162
Current position
– displaying 143
Customer Relations 189
Reference
Condition Based Service
CBS 207
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 29
Congestion
– refer to Route, bypassing
sections 138
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 107
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 70
Consumption indicator, refer
to Average consumption 70
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display
– brightness 79
– changing the language 79
– switching off/on 19
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16
Convenient access 34
– replacing the battery 35
Convenient loading in
convertible 28
Convenient operation
– glass roof 28
– glass roof with convenient
access 34
– retractable hardtop 28
– windows 28
– windows with convenient
access 34
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 228
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Displays
– on the Control Display 16
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 206
– remote control battery 35
– vehicle battery 219
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 72
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 81
Door key, refer to Remote
control 26
Door lock 30
Doors, emergency
operation 30
DOT Quality Grades 198
Draft-free ventilation 99
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Drivelogic 61
Drive mode 59
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Drive-off assistant 84
Drive position, engaging, refer
to Selector lever
positions 58
Drive programs, refer to
Drivelogic 61
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 92
Driving notes 116
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 84
Driving stability control
systems 82
Driving through water 117
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 116
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 99
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 82
DVD
– country codes 156
– settings 157
– video playback 156
DVD menu 157
DVD video 156
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
– indicator/warning lamp 83
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
E
EDC, refer to Electronic
Damper Control 83
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 146
Electric
– seat adjustment 43
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
– M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 60
Electric seat 43
Electric seat adjustment 43
Electric steering wheel lock
– with convenient access 34
Electronic brake-force
distribution 82
Electronic Damper Control
EDC 83
Electronic oil level check 203
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 82
Emergency operation
– fuel filler door, manual
release 194
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 37
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 30
Emergency release
– luggage compartment lid
from inside 32
Emergency Request 221
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 221
Engine
– breaking in 116
– data 228
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 69
– speed 228
– starting 56
– starting, convenient
access 34
– switching off 56
Engine compartment 203
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 206
Engine oil
– adding 205
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– checking level 203
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 72
– possible displays 204
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 228
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 228
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 56
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 94
Entry map for destination 132
Equalizer, tone setting 147
Error messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Event data recorders 208
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 116
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 101
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 70
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 195
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 150
Head airbags 88
Headlamp control,
automatic 92
Headlamp flasher 64
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Head restraints 44
– rear, removing 45
– sitting safely 42
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Failure of an electrical
consumer 220
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 33
– switching off an alarm 33
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 47
Fastest route for
navigation 137
Fast forward
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter for automatic
climate control 99
First aid pouch 222
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 55
Flash when locking/
unlocking 29
Flat tire
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
Flat tire, repairing 217
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– indicating a flat tire 85
– indicator/warning lamp 85
– initializing the system 84
– malfunction 85
– snow chains 84, 201
– system limits 84
Gasoline engine, checking
engine oil level 203
Gear
– neutral 59
Gear display, refer to Displays
in the instrument cluster 60
Gearshift lever
– manual transmission 57
Gearshifts
– manual transmission 57
General driving notes 116
Glass roof, electric 37
– closing after electrical
malfunction 37
– convenient operation 28, 30
– initializing 37
– opening, closing 37
– operation with convenient
access 34
– pinch protection system 37
– power failure 37
– raising 37
– remote control 28
Glove compartment 104
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 126
Grills 96
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 231
Mobility
F
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 199
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 66
FM, waveband 149
Folding up the floor panel 110
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 117
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 94
Forward position, engaging,
refer to Selector lever
positions 58
For your own safety 5
Free memory capacity, music
collection 164
Front airbags 88
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
Fuel 195
– average consumption 70
– gauge 69
– high-quality brands 195
– quality 195
– specifications 195
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 231
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Fuel filler door 194
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 194
Fuses 220
Reference
Exterior mirrors 48
– adjusting 48
– automatic dimming
feature 49
– automatic heating 49
– folding in and out 49
External audio device 105
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 224
– for tying down loads 119
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Heated
– mirrors 49
– rear window 99
– seats 46
Heating
– mirrors 49
– rear window 99
– residual heat 98
– seats 46
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 96
Heating while at a standstill,
refer to Using residual
heat 98
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 119
Height, refer to
Dimensions 229
Height adjustment
– seats 43
– steering wheel 50
High beams 94
– headlamp flasher 94
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 150
High-pressure
washer 209, 210
High water, refer to Driving
through water 117
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 137
Hills 117
Holders for cups 106
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 202
Hooks for shopping bags 109
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function 31
Hot exhaust system 116
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Brake assist 82
Hydroplaning 117
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 150
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 155
ID3 tags, refer to Album
information 163
Identification marks, tire
coding 198
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 79
– changing language 79
– changing units of measure
and display format 71
– controls 16
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– overview 16
– setting the date and time 75
– start menu 17
– status information 19
iDrive operating principle 16
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 55
Ignition lock 55
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– MDrive 51
– M Dynamic Mode 83
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 196
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Initializing
– after power failure 220
– compass, refer to Digital
compass, calibrating 103
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– glass roof 37
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 149
– refer to Setting the time and
date 75
Installation location
– CD changer 158
– navigation DVD drive 126
– telephone 105
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 138
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 94
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 101
Interior lamps 94
– remote control 28
Interior motion sensor 33
Interior rearview mirror 49
– automatic dimming
feature 49
– compass 103
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 65
Intersection, entering,
navigation 128
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 165
iPod, connecting, refer to
USB-audio interface 166
J
Jacking points 219
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 222
Jump starting 222
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 200
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 207
Malfunction
– tires 85
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 76
Managing music 163
Manual car wash 210
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
– transmission lock 60
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 92
– parking lamps/low beams 92
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 213
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 47
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 119
Last destinations 130
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 54
Launch Control 63
Leather care 211
LED light-emitting diodes 214
Length, refer to
Dimensions 229
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 217
Light-alloy wheels 211
Light-emitting diodes
LED 214
Lighter 107
– connecting electrical
appliances 107
Lighting
– instruments 94
– lamps and bulbs 213
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 92
Light switch 92
Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 119
Communications Entertainment
L
Manual transmission 57
– tow-starting 225
Map display 139
Map for navigation
– changing scale 139
– entering destination 132
Master key, refer to Remote
control 26
Maximum cooling 97
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 200
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 82
"MDrive" 50
MDrive 50
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 58
– kick-down 59
– Launch Control 63
– neutral 59
– reverse gear 59
– sequential mode 59
– Shift Lights 62
– shiftlock 59
– tow-starting 225
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 60
M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
– indicator lamp 83
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 229
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
M Engine Dynamics
Control 64
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– for automatic climate
control 99
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice commands 14
Mobility
Key, refer to Remote
control 26
Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 34
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 34
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Knock control 195
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 31
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 29
– from inside 31
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 34
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Low-beam headlamps 92
– automatic 92
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 43
Luggage compartment lid 31
– convenient access 34
– emergency release 32
– locking or unlocking
separately 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– remote control 28
Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 120
Lumbar support 43
LW, waveband 149
Reference
K
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Mirror dimming feature 49
Mirrors 48
– automatic curb monitor 49
– exterior mirrors 48
– heating 49
– interior rearview mirror 49
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 49
M Mobility System 217
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 175
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– operation via iDrive 175
– pairing 172
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 105
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 172
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port 165
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB-audio interface 166
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper system 65
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16
Music, playing 162
Music collection 161
– backup 164
– importing 164
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 165
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB-audio
interface 166
Music search 162
N
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 138
Navigation data 126
Navigation drive, location 126
Navigation DVD 126
Navigation system 126
– address book 129
– bypassing a route
section 138
– continuing destination
guidance 137
– destination entry 127
– displaying current
position 143
– entering a destination by
voice 133
– entering a destination
manually 127
– route list 138
– selecting destination via
map 132
– selecting route criteria 137
– special destinations 130
– starting destination
guidance 137
– terminating destination
guidance 137
– voice instructions 138
– volume adjustment 139
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 44
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 105
Neutral 59
New tires 199
North-facing map 139
Nozzles 96
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 228
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 225
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 208
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 195
Odometer 68
Oil, refer to Engine oil 203
Oil consumption 203
Oil level 203
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 219
Onboard tool kit 213
Opening and closing
– convenient access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 30
– via the remote control 27
Options, selecting for
navigation 137
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 99
Output, refer to Engine
data 228
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 98
Outside temperature
display 68
– changing units of
measure 71
– in computer 71
Outside temperature
warning 68
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
Overview
– radio control 146
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Radio
– controls 146
– High Definition Radio 150
– satellite radio 152
– selecting a waveband 149
– storing stations 149
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 55
Radio readiness 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Rain sensor 65
Reading lamps 95
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 215
– replacing bulb 215
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 45
– folding down backrests 108
Rear turn signals
– replacing bulb 215
Rear ventilation 99
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 48
Rear window defroster 99
Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sun blinds 104
Communications Entertainment
R
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19
Reception
– quality 150
– radio station 150
Recirculated-air mode 98
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 43
Refueling 194
Releasing
– hood 202
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 70
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 35
– convenient access 34
– garage door opener 101
– luggage compartment lid 28
– malfunction 29, 35
– removing from the ignition
lock 55
– service data 207
Replacement remote
control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 213
Replacing tires 199
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 199
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 148
Residual heat 98
Restraint systems
– for children 53
– refer to Safety belts 47
Retractable hardtop 38
– convenient operation 28
– opening and closing 39
– remote control 28
Reverse
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
Mobility
Paintwork care 210
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 81
Park Distance Control PDC 81
Parked car ventilation 99
– preselecting switch-on
times 100
– switching on and off
directly 100
Parking
– vehicle 56
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 81
Parking brake 57
– indicator lamp 57
Parking lamps 92
Parking lamps/low beams 92
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 49
Pathway lighting 93
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 175
Phone numbers
– dialing 176
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual
Polish 211
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter for automatic
climate control 99
Position, refer to Current
position, displaying 143
Postal code, entering for
navigation 128
Power failure 220
Power windows 35
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
Pressure, tires 196
Pressure monitoring, tires 84
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 222
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
Reference
P
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Reverse gear 59
– manual transmission 58
Road map 139
Roadside
Assistance 185, 221
Roadside parking lamps 94
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 72
Roller sun blinds 104
Rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– resetting 90
Roof load capacity 231
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 120
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 225
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 137, 138
– bypassing sections 138
– changing 137, 138
– changing criteria 137
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 138
– map display 139
– selecting 137
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 138
Route map, refer to Map
display 139
Route section, changing 138
Route selection 137
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 47
Safety belts 47
– belt hand-over 48
– damage 48
– indicator/warning lamp 48
– reminder 48
– sitting safely 42
Safety systems
– airbags 88
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
– brake system 82
– driving stability control
systems 82
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
– rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– safety belts 47
Satellite radio 152
– enabling channel 152
– selecting channel 153
– storing channel 153
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 224
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 152
Sealant, filling 218
Seat adjustment
– electric 43
– mechanical 43
Seat and mirror memory 46
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 48
Seat heating 46
Seats 42
– adjusting electrically 43
– adjusting the seats 43
– heating 46
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 46
– sitting safely 42
Securing cargo 110, 112
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Selecting new scale for
navigation 139
Selector lever positions 58
Sequential M Gearbox with
Drivelogic
– Drivelogic drive programs 61
Sequential mode 59
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 221
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 221
Service data in the remote
control 207
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 207
Service Request 189
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 207
Service requirements 72
Services status 190
Settings
– changing settings on the
Control Display 79
– clock, 12h/24h format 75
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 50
– DVD 157
– language 79
Settings and information 71
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 100
Shifting 60
Shifting gears
– manual transmission 57
Shift lever 58
Shift Lights 62
Shiftlock 59
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 60
Shift-up display, refer to Shift
Lights 62
Shock absorber control, refer
to Electronic Damper
Control EDC 83
Short commands for the voice
activation system 232
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 137
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
T
Tachometer 68
Tail lamp
– replacing bulb 217
Tail lamps 215
– replacing bulb 215
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 231
Technical data 228
– capacities 231
– dimensions 229
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telephone 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
TeleService Diagnosis 186
TeleService Help 186
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Storing tires 200
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 105
Street, entering,
navigation 128
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 196
Surface ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68
SVCD 156
SW, waveband 149
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 56
Switching on
– audio 146
– CD changer 146
– CD player 146
– radio 146
Switching the cooling function
on and off 99
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 100
Symbols 4
– status information 19
– traffic bulletins for navigation
system 140
Mobility
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 19
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 65
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Start/stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 222
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 222
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 55
Start menu 17
State/province, for
navigation 127
Station, selecting
– radio 149
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 209, 210
Steering wheel 50
– adjustment 50
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– lock 55
– locking with convenient
access 34
– MDrive button 50
– shift paddles 60
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 60
Storage 212
Storage compartments 105
Storage nets 109
"Store Channel"
on the radio 153
Storing music 161
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 46
Reference
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 155
– CD player 155
Side airbags 88
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 42
– with airbags 42
– with head restraint 42
– with safety belts 42
Ski bag 110
Ski bag for convertible, refer to
Through-loading opening
with integrated transport
bag 111
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 37
Slot for remote control 55
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 107
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 181
– use 172
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 105
Snow chains 201
Socket, On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 208
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 107
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 221
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 146
Spare fuses, 220
Spare fuses, refer to
Fuses 220
Special destinations 130
Speed
– with winter tires 200
Speed limit 78
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 78
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 147
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Temperature
– automatic climate control 97
– changing unit of measure 71
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 69
Temperature display
– outside temperature 68
– outside temperature
warning 68
– setting the units 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 119
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 217
Through-loading opening with
integrated transport
bag 111
Through-loading system 108
Tilt alarm sensor 33
Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 49
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 100
Tire inflation pressure 196
– loss 85, 86
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– resetting the system 86
– system limitations 85
– warning lamp 86
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 85
Tire Quality Grading 198
Tires
– age 198
– air loss 86
– breaking in 116
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 219
– condition 199
– damage 199
– inflation pressure 196
– labels 198
– minimum tread depth 199
– new wheels and tires 199
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– puncture 85
– replacing 199
– size 198
– storage 200
– tread depth 199
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 199
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 200
– winter tires 200
TMC station, refer to
Traffic bulletins 140
Tone
– control 146
– middle setting 148
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 213
Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 38
Top 50 of music
collection 163
Torque, refer to Engine
data 228
Tow bar 224
Tow fitting 224
– screw thread 224
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 224
Towing 223
– with manual
transmission 224
– with M dual clutch
transmission 224
Towing and tow-starting 223
Towing methods 224
Town/city, for navigation 127
Tow rope 225
Tow-starting 223, 225
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 85
Track
– selecting on CD 154
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Traffic bulletins
– categories 141
Traffic bulletins, filtering 141
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 140
– during destination
guidance 141
– in map display 141
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
bulletins 140
Transmission
– Drivelogic 61
– Launch Control 63
– manual transmission 57
– reverse gear 59
– Shift Lights 62
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 60
Transmission lock, unlocking
manually 60
Transporting children
safely 53
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 119
Travel instructions,
refer to Voice
instructions 138
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 199
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 68
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
V
VCD 156
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 198
Units
– average consumption 71
– temperature 71
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 101
Universal mobile phone
preparation package, refer
to separate Owner's Manual
Universal remote control 101
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 34
Unlocking
– from inside 31
– from outside 27
– luggage compartment lid 34
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 34
USB-audio interface 166
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Warning triangle 222
Washer fluid 66
– content of the reservoir 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 106
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 117
Water penetration 209, 210
Waveband with the radio 149
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 199
Weights 231
Welcome lamps 92
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 200
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 229
Wheels, new 199
Wheels and tires 196
Width, refer to
Dimensions 229
Wind deflector 40
Windows 35
– convenient operation 28
– convenient operation with
convenient access 34
– opening, closing 35
– pinch protection system 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 65
Windshield wash 65
– filling capacity, reservoir 231
– nozzles 66
– reservoir for washer fluid 66
– washer fluid 66
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 213
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 65
Winter tires 200
– setting speed limit 78
– storage 200
Wiper blade replacement 213
Mobility
U
Vehicle
– battery 219
– breaking in 116
– cargo loading 118
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 203
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 229
– parking 56
– weight 231
Vehicle jack 219
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 143
Vehicle storage 212
Ventilation 99
– draft-free 99
– in the rear 99
Ventilation, refer to Climate 96
Ventilation while at a
standstill 99
Vents, refer to Ventilation 99
Video menu 156
Video playback 156
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 138
Voice commands
– overview 22
– short commands 232
Voice instructions from
navigation system 138
– repeating 139
– switching on/off 138
– volume 139
Volume 146
– audio sources 146
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 231
– mobile phone 175
– TV 146
– voice instructions 139
Volume balance, tone
setting 147
Reference
Triple turn signal activation 64
Trip odometer 68
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 31
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 229
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
– triple turn signal 64
Turn signals 64
TV
– control elements 146
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 119
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Wiper system 65
Word-matching principle for
navigation 137
Work in the engine
compartment 202
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 213
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 214
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to MDrive 50
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 26
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
More about BMW
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
01 41 2 600 999 ue iDrive
bmwusa.com
*BL260099900L*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG